JP2016034294A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can enhance interest by adding new game property.SOLUTION: A game machine performs a lottery about a game, variably displays symbols on the basis of a result of lottery to notify that the game is in progress, and stop displays the symbols to notify that the game is over, is controlled into a profit imparting state that profit is imparted when game media pass a specific area in a game area, and is controlled into a normal game or an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal game state when the profit imparting state is over. By a specific loss condition that includes consumption of a lottery without being controlled into the profit imparting state that is controlled into an advantageous state although at least one of a prescribed number of lotteries ends up in a specific result, it can be determined whether the game machine is controlled into a super-advantageous state after the profit imparting state is over.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 19

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (also generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine that executes a jackpot lottery when a game ball wins at the start opening, and gives a player a large number of game balls when a win is won. Further, as such a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which diversification of games is achieved by using a type 1 and type 2 compound machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-039603 A

  However, although the game is diversified by using a type 1 and type 2 multi-function machine like the above-described game machines, there are not a few players who are bored with the game and are less interested.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a gaming machine that can be improved by adding new gaming characteristics.

  In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means capable of launching a game medium in a game area, a lottery means for performing a lottery concerning a game, and a lottery result by the lottery means being a specific result. Pass control means for controlling a specific area within the game area to allow passage of game media, and profit granting for controlling to a profit grant state that gives a profit when the game medium passes through the specific area State control means and gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state after the end of the profit granting state to either a normal state or a super advantageous state that is super advantageous over the normal state in a predetermined lottery count And at least one of the predetermined number of lotteries in a state controlled to the advantageous state, and the lottery is selected with the specific result, but without being controlled to the profit granting state. It characterized in that it and a beneficial state acquisition means that may enable determine is controlled to the ultra advantageous state after the benefit applied state terminated by specific loss condition is satisfied which includes the digestion of the selection.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be improved by adding new gaming properties.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was seen from the back. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. (A) is a plan view of a tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamper-proof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cuts and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a front view which expands and shows the principal part of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize opening unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize opening unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the winning opening unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the winning opening unit for every main structure, and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of a prize opening unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable start port unit of a prize opening unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable start opening unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the variable start port unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the variable start port unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting port door member of the variable starting port unit retracted from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the start port door member of the variable start port unit advanced from the upper side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the accessory unit of the prize opening unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the accessory unit from the back. (A) is a front view of an accessory unit, (b) is AA sectional drawing in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the accessory prize winning unit of the accessory unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the accessory prize winning unit and was seen afterwards. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V winning opening unit of the accessory unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V winning opening unit and was seen afterwards. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the receiving part of the rotary body of the V winning opening unit faced the receiving side from the front side, (b) is the state which the receiving part of the rotary body faced the V winning opening side It is explanatory drawing shown from the front side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the right game ball in a game board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the start port door member retracted in the variable start port unit from the front side, (b) is the game ball in the state where the start port door member has advanced It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from the front side. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the start port door member retracted in the variable start port unit from the left front, (b) is the game ball in the state where the start port door member has advanced It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from the left front, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state in which the start port door member is retreating from the left front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when a prize winning port can be received in the bonus unit from the front side, and (b) is a V winning slot in which the receiving part of the rotating body in the V winning slot unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when it faces to the side from the front side. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the determination result of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 1st starting port detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2nd starting port detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate detection process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special symbol process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit determination process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation pattern setting process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal symbol process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start opening door process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the opening rotation control process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the opening rotation control process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening release control process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game state setting process of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of an effect control process of a periphery control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of an effect control process of a periphery control board. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of an effect control process of a periphery control board.

(First embodiment of the present invention)
[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. 1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball T (see FIGS. 122, 123, etc.) as a game medium is mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side; A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close the front surface of the frame 3 and the game board 4 from the player side is provided. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball T disposed below the game window 101. And a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5. .

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in terms of the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball T is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can handle the handle device 500 with the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301. Is rotated, the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch the game ball T, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 98), various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 10). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to hold the pachinko machine 1 easily as a finger hook, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend toward the center of the tip from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b, and the left side frame depending on the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during a normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 and performs a driving operation of the game ball T, and is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear surface, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a gaming window 101 closed on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 A glass unit 590 to be attached.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 1113 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. And a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control board provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 1, and an amplification circuit that amplifies an acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 1116 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., the wiring cord 196 connecting the payout control board 1101, the peripheral control board 1116, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 61).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in a front view) is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. And a ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and a game ball T penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300. And a handle for attaching the handle bracket 140 so that the right (open side) end of the front surface of the ball feed opening 113 for feeding to the front side and bulging forward disposed in the lower right corner in front view is inclined. An attachment portion 114, a wiring passage opening 115 through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114, and Cylinder lock 1010 upper by being formed shorter extended cylindrical shape toward forward below the dollar mounting portion 114 is provided with an insertion possible Joana 116.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130 and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 at appropriate positions. Is formed.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and includes a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is recessed substantially backward in a triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to perform an illegal act with respect to the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is made of a metal that can be drilled with a thin drill or the like from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121 and can prevent an illegal act.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction and having an I-shaped cross section as shown in FIGS. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 1113, the peripheral control board 1116, the payout control board 1101, and the like as the main body-side electrical equipment, and the door side can be prevented. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, and a rental unit 360 as electrical devices Handle device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the upper surface, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent toward the front (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 63). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 63), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the right (axial support side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 in a rear view is longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end projection 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, The right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted thereon, and the side inner on the lower side A right side lower decorative board 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214. The right side attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214. An upper decorative board cover 218, and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 while being disposed at a front surface of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, while being attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated with light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control board 1116, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 1116. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and a left end at the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. It is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a plurality extending substantially concentrically with the gaming window 101. A radiating lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower central portion of the game window 101 when viewed from the front, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed backward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  Further, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, a side diffusing lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 can be diffused widely in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a in the side lens 210 is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses at the peak portion protruding forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 can diffuse and refract light by a wrinkle-like portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. The side inner lens 212 cooperates with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side to glitter the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. As well as letting you see it, you can make it look strange.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are disposed at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively high irradiation. Those having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. Note that the LEDs 214c of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red and green LEDs in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The upper side inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. As with the side inner lens 212, the front side inner lens 206 also has a front surface formed in a wrinkle shape, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a peak portion protruding forward in the wrinkled portion. In addition, the light can be irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiating lens portion 210b that is recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rocky surface that is rugged by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 thus made can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the right side is the gaming window 101. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially same width as the right side decoration unit 200 and extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and an oval shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a that are continuous with the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extend in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a large And a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 also includes a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250 An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and having a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 A plurality of bands extending in a radial pattern centered on the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view, and a transparent upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252. The upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffusion part formed by a plurality of band-like lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially centered on the lower left and right centers And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decorative unit 240, a side lower decorative frame 242, a side upper decorative frame 244, a left side upper decorative substrate cover 258, and a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. Further, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right central lower portions of the gaming window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, there are formed opening frames 242c and 244c that pass through the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a state of being cut out, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is diffused and refracted by the diffusion portion 252a. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control board 1116, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 1116. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example has a shape extending in the vertical direction along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form a peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and an outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a substantially triangular shape. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with the side opened. The side upper decoration frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

  The side upper decorative frame 244 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size that combines the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size that extends from the center to the left side of the left and upper sides of the game window 101. Yes. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is recessed from the rear side, and is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 includes a plurality of slits 251 a that are arranged on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250 a in the side lens 250 and extend along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 as a center. Several are provided. In addition, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  In addition, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Yes. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into the inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially centering on the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 on the front surface. The decorative member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonal) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion part 252 a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the drawing, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusers 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are larger than the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) is used.

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the mischief of the left upper speaker 262 or the breaking of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is less likely to cause noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side lens 250 including a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms and curved the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and is disposed on the rear surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and provided with a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. A left side upper decorative substrate 254 and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses. (See FIG. 33 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. It is irradiated from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, a part of the light irradiated forward (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to irradiate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. And since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected toward the inner decoration member 251 by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a at the (front surface), and a part of the light reflected from the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved, so The light reflected on the rear surface side converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has a direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and a peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surface of the lens part 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersected by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-like lenses in the side inner lens 252. It diffuses in the direction of (substantially orthogonal). Accordingly, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective can be made (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extended frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 having a frame-like lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower part arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283; an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward; and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 A light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 disposed on the rear side of the light shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative substrate 288 on which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the tube portion 287a are mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of front decoration units 280 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 289. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290, is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear part of the board cover 291 and extends backward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; An upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295; a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295; and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 glitters with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. And an extended frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially are arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the axis of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, the plurality of prisms and belt-like lenses of the upper lens 282 can diffuse light, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses are formed on the rear side, so that light can be irregularly refracted. Is invisible.

  In addition, the upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light emission. Furthermore, the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decorative board 290 can light up and decorate the upper extended frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately causing the LED 290a to emit light.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls T paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and stored in the upper plate 301. The game ball T can be supplied to the hit ball launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward and has a large front side left side (axial support side) bulging forward, and the front end of the upper plate body 312 covers the upper outer periphery. Upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction is projected forward, upper plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of upper plate upper panel 314, and upper plate front part The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and is located on the right upper side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  In addition, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the right and left center to the lower surface on the right side, and is attached to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted thereon. A part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 can be illuminated by decorating the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 as appropriate.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-like lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 to be described later are provided at a portion that covers the lower end front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right side in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower left and right center left sides of the lower plate cover 328. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Also, the dish unit 300 is disposed at the lower end of the lower dish upper left side cover 332 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 that are obliquely extended to cover the left side front end of the lower dish body 324 and the left front end of the lower dish top plate 326, and the front and rear. A lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that allows the sound to be transmitted by closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and protection A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower pan lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower dish top plate 326 is covered with an upper dish front decorative member 316.

  The dish unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 formed in a continuous shape and having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in the shape of a disk that is loosely curved so as to close 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the game balls T attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game ball T stored in the lower tray 302 and attached to the lower left side of the tray unit base 310 is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 on the upper left side in a front view. A ball rental unit 360 that operates the ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store the game ball T by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. In addition, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store the game balls T by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball T can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. Thus, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper tray ball supply port 310 c is closed by the game ball T stored in the upper tray 301, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540. However, the game ball T that has been paid out comes into contact with the game ball T with the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c closed. The rolling direction is changed, and the inside of the guide recess 310j is guided to roll rightward as viewed from the front. From the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301. Will be released. Thereby, the game balls T can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball T blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player can manually play the game balls T. It is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls T that have been paid out to the upper plate 301 without bringing the player into the upper plate 301, and the player feels bothered by the storage of the game balls T in the upper plate 301. It is possible to inhibit the player from devoting the game ball T to the driving operation of the game ball T or playing the game ball T, and to reduce the interest in the game. The amount of T stored can be increased.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls T in the lower plate 302 collected on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g. The game ball T can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls T are formed so as to be positioned in the vicinity of the intermediate position in the vertical direction, and the game balls T supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has come to be.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball T from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball T can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and a decoration attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decoration member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c that is formed in a step shape that is further lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 to be described later. Yes.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed with a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side, while the left side is formed in a smooth shape from a position right to the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed on the rear side of the left smoothly formed portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316 in the assembled state. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player side and looks like a feeling of distance.

  The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces whose surfaces are curved in a spindle shape, similar to the right part of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 which will be described later. Further, the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), can diffuse light refractingly, and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Yes. An upper plate decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration board 322 is connected to the upper plate decoration board 322. By appropriately emitting light, the upper dish front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 can emit light appropriately.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front end and side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is made of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic feeling (matte state such as a sandblast treatment instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower dish side cover 330 includes a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the dish unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower pan upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower pan lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface thereof. The plate-shaped part which forms is provided. An opening 334a of the lower left lower cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 to be described later, so that sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower pan left lower cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The dish unit 300 of this example is configured such that the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334, and the lower dish side cover 330, the lower dish lower left cover 334, Is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. The upper plate ball release button 341 is moved up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310. The operation piece 342 is supported so as to be operable (turnable), and the plate unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper dish ball removal slider 343 that is provided on the rear side of the dish unit base 310 and includes an upper dish ball removal slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b (see FIG. 42 and FIG. 42) for guiding the game ball T communicating with the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guiding the game ball T passing through the opening 344a downward. 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. A ball passage 344c through which the outgoing game ball T can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. 580 can be supplied.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 Can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a and the ball guide path 344b of the upper plate ball removal base 344. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet channel 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g through the lower dish ball supply port 310h through the lower dish ball supply rod 310h. Can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is arranged between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 and forms a bottom center part of the dish unit 300. A punching base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353. Yes.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Be able to.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball T can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward and are opened and closed by sliding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 backward. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball hole 352b move backward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. The game ball T stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game ball T held in the state of being coincident with the punch hole 3324b and being stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball release button 354 is not continuously pressed.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is moved to the lower plate by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coinciding with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball T can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball rental unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with a cash or prepaid card and the ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls T are transferred to the dish unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the top plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the lending unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363, a lending remaining display portion 363 that is disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365, and a lending button 361. And a ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting part 310b of the tray unit base 310 covering the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the rear cover. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 that closes the display opening 310n is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protrudes forward. The rental remaining display part 363 arranged on the rear side through the player can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of the present example has a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. It is arranged to face. In the rental unit 360, the return button 362 is disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  The ball rental unit 360 also includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (player side) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before the hand touches the lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be aware of the presence of the lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation according to the gaming state, or can move the dial operation unit 401. It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. There is a spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430 a that is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation section holding member 416 and the inner cylinder section 401 a of the dial operation section 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the ring, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is latched and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by a substrate holding claw 416g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through-hole 406a. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward / reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from the upper side; A pair of board holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (press operation unit) 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached thereto. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached with a predetermined screw to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and then The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Thereby, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed and the impacts can be prevented from being concentrated. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, thereby enabling the dial operation unit It is possible to make the production using 401 (press operation unit 405) more diverse and less tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being lowered.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is apparently adjusted to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414. Can withstand high loads , It is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c that detects the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and it is more effective for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 including the upper dish 301 that stores the game balls T, the strength rigidity of the dish unit 300 is likely to store a large number of game balls T. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a hard hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 which is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the handle body rear 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In addition, the handle device 500 has a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 that can rotate integrally with the shaft 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. And a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 511. Auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508 A single-shot button 520 that is pivotally supported and operates a firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504 so that the handle body 504 is in an initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Energized to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and has a rear end portion that extends in a cylindrical shape rearward from a front end portion that bulges rearwardly. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 504a concentrically arranged with the rotation shaft is formed in the handle main body 504, and three attachment bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. These mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. Accordingly, the rotational range of the handle body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 coming into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b protruding rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects a player's contact, when the handle body 504 rotates, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball T is driven. Be able to. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball T by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball T can be driven. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520 and the firing power supply board 831 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thus, the launch of the game ball T can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and before the single button 520 is operated by releasing the single button 520 pressing operation. The game ball T can be launched with a driving strength of.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle main body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch power supply substrate 831 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launch device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected to the door as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a gaming ball T driving defect. Thereby making it possible.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball T paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. In spite of this, the game ball T (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of the present example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game balls T therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover base that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right when viewed from the front end toward the front end of 542, and a second sphere inlet 542c that is disposed outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right side when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a. And a second sphere inlet 542c that communicates with the second sphere passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other (see FIG. 61 and the like). As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of about 3 times the outer diameter of the game ball T. A storage space 546 that can store a predetermined amount of the game ball T is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d through the foul ball inlet 542e that is arranged at the substantially upper center in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball T supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. It can supply to the upper plate 301 from the outlet 544a through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball T supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball. From the outlet 544b, the tray unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply rod 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball T launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls through the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. The foul cover unit 540 then discharges the game ball T received by the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d ( Supply).

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d and is swingable by the game ball T stored in the accommodation space 546. The swing member 548 supported by the shaft 542, the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and the swing member 548 are urged by the full detection sensor 550 in a non-detection state. And a spring 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is turned to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end in the rear view of the cover base 542, respectively. , And the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the circulation of the game ball T can be removed.

  In this example, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 through the foul cover unit 540. If the game ball T is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even when the upper plate 301 is full, the ball stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet in the full tank branch unit 770 When the normal passage 773 upstream of 774 is also full, the game ball T circulates to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full sphere outlet 776 of the unit 770 to the second sphere inlet 542c, the second sphere passage 542d, and the second sphere outlet of the foul cover unit 540 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 44b.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the game balls T cannot be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the inside of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The stagnant game ball T is stored. Further, as the game ball T is paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls T are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls T acts on the swing member 548, and the biasing force of the spring 552 is exerted. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves against the left side. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 1101 (see FIG. 125). The player is notified that the game ball T in the dish unit 300 is discharged to the outside.

  When the game ball T in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. Is not detected, and the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls T supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650 and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. T can be extracted to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removing button 341 of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110, and the front and rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has an entrance 581a that penetrates through and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and that is open at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is open A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball T penetrating in the front-rear direction and entering from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and a rear cover 582, A partitioning portion that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 581 and partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball release member 583 having 83a and the game balls T on the partition portion 583a of the ball release member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 that is supported so as to be rotatable around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 is formed. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. In addition, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball T. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball T held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The game ball T is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball T on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball T, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is The received game ball T is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654 by the firing power supply substrate 831.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball T does not enter the ball removal port 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381b and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball T that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by the coil spring, the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 so as to be detachable from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose overall outer diameter in the rear view is a horizontally long shape, and is on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip which is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c, which are divided vertically with a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side), and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in a direction perpendicular (rearward) to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588 so as to be separated from each other. A character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the distal end (left end side in the rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cutting part 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece part 588b and the upper side of the lower piece part 588c intersect each other at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud preventing member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It is like that. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is shown. A portion corresponding to the portion where the is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the hit ball launching device 650 sends the illegal game ball I to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 moves obliquely to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in the front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. An attempt is made to enter the game area 1100 through the game. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I. It moves along the route connecting with the shortest distance in the passage. Accordingly, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launcher 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the hitting ball supply port 582a so as to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed at the upper right of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear view. The wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) that extends rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the anti-fraud member 588 disposed at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the unauthorized game ball I is pulled by the unauthorized game ball I in the cutting direction 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 in a direction in which the gap is narrowed (leftward in front view). In this state, friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw is cut (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, it does not enter the game area 1100 between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

  Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588. Can be prevented. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, so that it is impossible to perform an illegal act. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d, thereby reducing the momentum of the illegal game ball I and playing area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion, so that it is possible to prevent illegal acts.

  As described above, according to this example, the game ball T is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball T is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is played. When the player operates, the game ball T is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, so that the door frame 5 A game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game window 101 of the player, and the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or A ball feed unit 580 having a ball feed solenoid 585 and the like and a discharge mechanism (ball remover member 583) are disposed. Not only the ball feeding member 584 and the hit ball launching device 650 are brought as close as possible, but when the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball feeding member 584 side It is possible to reduce the number of game balls T remaining in the game as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball T can be hit. It is possible to prevent the game ball T in the upper plate 301 from disappearing at an early stage or the game ball T from being fully filled with the game ball T due to the insertion operation. Since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome with respect to the ball T and to suppress the interest, the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301. The pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest by making the game area 1100 relatively large (wide) can be obtained.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, and if the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced with the game ball T, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be exchanged. Even if a failure occurs, the failure can be easily eliminated by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball T is discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward, or the upper plate The game ball T can be stopped from being discharged from the player 301, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball T from the upper plate 301 vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal) The durability of the member 583) can be increased. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, the game ball T can be made difficult to repel even if the game ball T collides with the partition portion 583a. It is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged due to the repelling of the ball and causing problems.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the partition portion 583a is moved when the load of the game ball T is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper pan ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. Similar effects can be obtained.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b which bent the partitioning part 583a, when the game ball T collides with the partitioning part 583a, the turning hook which bent the impact. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing by the portion 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 is discharged when the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is discharged. Can be minimized, and the game balls T can be discharged well by improving the streets of the game balls T in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game ball T in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 has a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball hitting device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw adhering to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentary) state immediately after being fired by the ball hitting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. As the wire Iw is pulled quickly (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the force of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent entry into the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the tamper-proof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the anti-fraud member 588 is injured by an operator during assembly. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the anti-fraud member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper upper piece 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting part 588d is formed, the cutting part 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a disposed on the upper sides of the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. Stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Molding decoration on door frame]
Next, modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, shape decoration, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls T arranged vertically below the vertically long oval gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. At the same time, the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is provided. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The door frame 5 is greatly different in appearance on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance crumpled by the side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 that are visible on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. It has become.

  58, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have different amounts of forward projection, as shown in FIG. 58, and the right side decoration unit 200 has a left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward larger than 240. In addition, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is seen from the front right side, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front part When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 appears larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 becomes almost invisible, and a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like that. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be given an illusion like a pachinko machine of a different model, the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play, etc. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the whole appearance of the island equipment is smooth and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives the player a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby allowing the gaming window 101 to emit light. It is possible to decorate the light emission with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed on the rear side of the side flash lenses 204 and 246, respectively. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off to change the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210 a and 250 a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming window 101 at the center in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is disposed between the peripheral lens portion 250a and the side inner lens 252 in the side lens 250.

  Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) are provided. . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b are relatively high in luminance. LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and outward outward from the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extending to the right. The front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. On the upper central decorative substrate 288, a plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface, and the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually decorated with light emission. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extended frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light emission. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a on the upper central decorative board 288 and the upper side decorative board 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this dish unit 300, an upper dish decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the upper dish decoration element 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decoration board 322 are used in the upper dish decoration element 316. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 that decorates the right part and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. It is possible to notify various information to a person or a game hall employee who installed the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282 b in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper center group 106 is configured to illuminate and decorate the upper center. The LED 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make a light emitting decoration that becomes a dot. The LED 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 arranged on the lower side of the gaming window 101 is used to decorate the upper dish 301 with light emission. The dish group 108 is set. In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d on the front and rear sides and on the right and left sides. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, there are three times 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by coordinating with LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to produce a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each of the systems 102 a to 102 j and 103 a to 103 j is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 is aligned along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

  Further, by causing the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 to emit light, an opportunity or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, a short time gaming state, a probability variation short gaming state) , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emission effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation is performed. A light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405 can be performed. In addition, the system 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. The ball launching device 650 for driving the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and the game ball T to the upper plate 301 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 A prize ball unit 700 for paying out and a game ball T attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. Sphere blocking flow And a mouth closing unit 790,.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 which is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and a positioning projection 607 which projects upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1112 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball T is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock engagement holes 621 are engaged with and engaged with engagement protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000, and the front end frame portion 602 is engaged. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is provided so that the game ball T can be circulated from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed on the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and a game ball T that circulates in the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 will be described in detail later. Has come to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball T supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. It is.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. At the same time that 658 is allowed to pass, a gap is formed through which the game ball T cannot pass, and the game ball T is held at the base end of the firing rail 660. The hitting ball 656 (tip 658) is rotated toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball T held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the stop piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662 can be hit. And a stopper 664 for regulating.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball T hit by the hitting ball basket 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. . The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball T so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side when viewed from the front of the launch rail 660, thereby bringing the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. You can type in. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball T that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching power supply substrate 831 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball T to the hit ball launching device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball T, and the ball feed solenoid 585 from that state. When the driving of the ball feeding member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball T received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side, so that the firing solenoid is almost simultaneously with the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. By driving (ON) 654, the game ball T can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball T can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball 656. Can be done.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball T supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then pays out a predetermined payout. Based on the instruction, the payout is made to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a game ball T attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing a game ball T supplied from the island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls T stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and the game balls T arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the game ball T paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is fully filled with the game ball T. Then, a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the paid game ball T to the lower plate 302 side is mainly provided.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The award ball passage cover 780 in the award ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a when viewed from the back. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the game ball T paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device attachment section 714, and the rear An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the wall portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed explanation is omitted on the prize ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls T can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball T on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It is like that.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that the game balls T circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. Further, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and it is possible to prevent the game ball T from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730, It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the tank rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball T can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball T can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls T can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom part is inclined so that the part is lowered. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front so as to be located immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. Is received, and can be transferred to the prize ball device 740 side from the discharge port 731a. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball T in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. A piece 735 and a ground plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball T in the tank rail 731 are provided. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls T partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. Can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcing the game ball T, which has not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, to become one level, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 narrows toward the discharge port 731a side. It attaches to the tank rail 731 so that it may become.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls T flowing down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls T aligned in two rows are alternately arranged one by one. It is sent to the prize ball device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball T in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball T comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of the game ball T to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. ing.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game ball T and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game ball T discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. belongs to. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side so as to open to the upper end and extend to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball T. A passage 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b as viewed from the rear, and bent in a substantially letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side of the view, and a ball passage 741d that extends downward and communicates with the lower right side (axis support side) of the distribution space 741b and opens to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects a presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a, and the game ball T attached to the unit base 741 and circulates in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number of rotations, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates together with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 for holding the rotation angle sensor 752 on the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753 to be attached, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 through the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 1101. It is equipped with.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), A gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage that can contact the game ball T that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The grounding metal 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball T discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 is reduced. Can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball T to be played, the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 741e. In a state where the game ball T in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or It is reported to the hall side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball T in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball T flowing in the supply passage 741a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. At the top of the back cover 742, a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attaching / detaching button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and relay board mounting The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and generates heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball T at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the body 748, the game balls T supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. . The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 1113, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 1101 or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls T can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 engaged with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c. The game balls T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the rotating body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. . On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game ball T paid out to the ball extraction passage 741d side by 748 is, from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d, a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770, which will be described later, The substrate unit 800 can be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball T paid out to the prize ball path 741 c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball T is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball T can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving the game ball T flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). ), A normal path 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball T from the position immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball T flowing through the normal path 773 is released forward. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right front end of the front end, and a full passage 775 that guides the game ball T toward the front side from a position that is further to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 ( Figure 9 and the reference), and includes full Tan passage 775 game balls T which has flowed through the full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 is discharged to the front, the.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 for receiving a game ball T that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part in front view and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740. A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball T received at the ball extraction port 777 forward, and the game ball T flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and a normal ball at the left end in front view. A ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball T released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game ball T supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Yes. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base. The main body frame base ball extraction passageway 622 is delivered to 600.

  The full tank branching unit 770 receives the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball T that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball T flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball T is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with the game ball T, the first of the foul cover unit 540 is obtained. The game ball T that has become unable to exit from the ball outlet 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually reaches the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. The inside is also full. In this state, the game ball T that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts moving in the horizontal direction in the branch space 772, and moves in the horizontal direction. The game ball T thus entered enters the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full ball exit 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. Is supplied to the lower plate 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game ball T becomes full in the upper plate 301, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 is removed until the full tank is eliminated. Since it can be automatically supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball T is supplied to the ball striking device by operating the ball pulling button of the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being interrupted due to being stopped, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example uses the path of the game ball T to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls T that are branched and stay in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls T in the upper plate 301 and the game balls T in the normal passage 773 are discharged. Becomes a game ball T that can be directly shot by the hitting ball launcher 650, and the storage amount of the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. Become. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls T as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball T can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path (the full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls T in the main body frame 3 can be obtained. Moreover, it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage trays is different increases.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Further, the game ball T sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame having only one storage tray. Even if it is changed to 5, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage is reduced. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls T for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. It has become.

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 is sent to the upper plate 301. Therefore, the frequency at which the game ball T stored in the lower plate 302 is transferred to the upper plate 301 is increased. It is possible to reduce the amount of the game ball T, so that the player can be dedicated to the driving operation of the game ball T and the like, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game ball T, and the player is not frequently concerned about the storage amount. While being able to play a game, it is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with the game ball T. Even if the game ball T can no longer come out from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball T stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is as much as possible. The substantial storage amount of the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. When only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, the storage tray becomes full of game balls T, and the game balls T cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank outlet 776. However, since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, not only the normal path 773 but also the full tank path 775 has many. The game balls T can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of the game balls T stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game ball T in each door frame 5 is changed without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to the maximum and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to distribute the game balls T in a plurality of rows. ) Can be increased, so that even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, the substantial storage amount of the game balls T in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be avoided, and can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball T in the main body frame 3.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball T is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and there is a problem. When this occurs, it is possible to easily find the location where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, so that the malfunction can be resolved early and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball T.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held by the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-down direction in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball T remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, the game ball T will be spilled from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776. Can be prevented.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The substrate unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the board unit base 810. The board base unit 810 also passes the game ball T flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. You can send.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a heavy bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above into an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat radiation holes on its upper and lower surfaces in order to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface communicating the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the launching power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches its lifetime due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute each time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launcher 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4, and by changing the model, etc. When the game board 4 is replaced, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) can also be easily replaced, so that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that can realize the driving characteristics matching the concept of the new model to be replaced, By replacing the launch power supply board 831 provided with the DC / DC converter 831a, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 may be matched with the new game board 4. it can. Accordingly, the driving characteristics of the game ball T can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 with respect to island facilities such as a game hall. It can be simplified and can be exchanged in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall can be suppressed. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the cost required for changing the driving characteristics is reduced as compared with the case where the entire payout control board 1101 is replaced. And the burden on the hall side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being cheated on the fired power supply substrate 831 and also having a high defense against fraud.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 opens the game ball T released upward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the upper left side of the left and right center in front view. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 to be received, the discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball T received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging, and the side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) A front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the launch power supply board box 830 and the entire rear face of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. And a rear box housing portion 844 capable of housing the front end.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball T that has flowed down and the game ball T that has been discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are connected to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. It can be discharged to the lower side.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. A wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal with the wiring cord extended is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to be turned back (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a payout control board 1101 (see FIG. 125) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 1101 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 1113 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connecting terminal plate cover 873 is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 after the fixing piece 873h is inserted, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so that it can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent a gap from being formed, and it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control board 1116 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIG. 1 and FIG. 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c provided to the peripheral control board 1116 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that passes through the connection notch 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 1103 a and the test terminal 1103 b of the main control board box 1103 in the game board 4 through the connection notch 910. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a substrate management seal 1103c (see FIG. 5) attached to the rear surface of the main control substrate box 1103 faces the rear side. The sealing portion 1103d of the main control board box 1103 faces through the cutout portion 914. Accordingly, the operation check, appearance check, management status check, and the like of the main control board box 1103 and the main control board 1113 can be performed without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated through the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through-holes 918 are in a state in which the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the game board 4 in a state in which the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3. It is positioned behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control board 1116 and the like provided in the apparatus, so that heat from the peripheral control board 1116 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball T so that the game ball T does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attaching portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared to the case where the side surface 1001b is dense.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted through a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are in contact. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 and the cylinder lock penetration hole 611 up and down. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls T supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls T discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the portion 710b, and a game ball T released from the tank rail unit 730 is delivered to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. A part of the award ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the wall portion 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 74 are provided. Since it has a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as the rear surface, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. The rear side and the rear side surface can be visually confirmed, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visually inspected) without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. A pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game ball T cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball T spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball T from entering the pachinko machine 1 through the above, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball T entering.

[2. Game board configuration]
The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125. As shown in FIG. 98, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is attached to a frame-shaped front component member 1111 that partitions the outer peripheral side of the game area 1100, and to the rear side of the front component member 1111. And a flat gaming panel 1112 that partitions the rear end side of the gaming area 1100.

  The front component member 1111 is formed in a quadrangular outer periphery shape, and the inner peripheral shape is formed in a substantially semicircular shape on the left side and a substantially U-shaped right side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. This front component member 1111 forms a first inner wall portion 1111a that is smoothly connected to the entire semicircular arc portion on the inner peripheral surface and a portion extending to the left and right above the U-shaped portion, In the U-shaped portion, the remaining portion extending vertically and the lower portion extending left and right form a second inner wall portion 1111b connected in an L shape. Further, the front component member 1111 is a guide wall extending in an arc shape along the first inner wall portion 1111a from the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b (the left end in front view of the portion extending in the left and right direction) to the vicinity of the upper left corner in the front view. 1111c and a check piece 1111d rotatably attached to the upper end of the guide wall 1111c.

  The game panel 1112 is formed with an out port 1112a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower end of the inner periphery of the front component member 1111 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 1112a is formed at a position where the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 is connected to the lower end of the guide wall 1111c. In addition, the gaming panel 1112 is formed with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction substantially at the center of the gaming area 1100.

  Further, the game board 4 includes a substrate holder 1102 (see FIG. 6) attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1112, a main control board box 1103 attached to the substrate holder 1102, and a main control board box 1103. A main control board 1113 (see FIG. 125) that controls the game content that is housed inside, and a function that displays the game state and the like based on a control signal from the main control board 1113 and is attached to the front component member 1111 Display 1114.

  Furthermore, the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1112 so as to be visible from the front side through the opening of the game panel 1112, and is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1115, and is mainly controlled. And a peripheral control board 1116 for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1115 and the like based on a control signal from the board 1113. The game board 4 includes a front unit 1120 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112 in the front view game area 1100, and a back unit 3000 (see FIG. 6) attached to the rear side of the game panel 1112. It is equipped with.

  The front unit 1120 is attached to the approximate center in the game area 1100 in a front view, and a center accessory 1130 that divides the game area 1100 right and left, and a winning opening attached to the lower side of the center accessory 1130. A unit 1150.

[2-1. Center character]
The center accessory 1130 is formed in a frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the game panel 1112 in a state of being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening of the game panel 1112. This center accessory 1130 releases a warp entrance 1131 through which the game ball T can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a game ball T that has entered the warp entrance 1131, and is open at the bottom in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A warp outlet 1132.

  The center accessory 1130 includes a right channel 1133 through which the game ball T can flow on the right side when viewed from the front, a gate member 1134 that is disposed in the right channel 1133 and through which the game ball T can pass, And a gate sensor 1135 for detecting the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134.

  The right flow path 1133 of the center accessory 1130 is opened upward at the lower side of the stop portion 1111e where the first inner wall portion 1111a and the second inner wall portion 1111b at the upper right corner of the front component member 1111 intersect. The entrance gate 1133a, the entrance passage 1133b for guiding the game ball T downward from the entrance entrance 1133a, and a gate of a predetermined width connected to the lower end of the entrance passage 1133b and having a gate member 1134 disposed at the center A space 1133c, a guide path 1133d for guiding the game ball T downward from a lower end of the gate space 1133c along a part of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 and an opening at the lower end of the guide path 1133d And a discharge port 1133e through which the sphere T is discharged downward.

  In the right channel 1133, the entrance 1133a is opened larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the entrance path 1133b following the entrance 1133a has a width slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball T on the lower end side. Thus, it is formed to become narrower as it goes downward. The gate space 1133c extends greatly vertically and horizontally on the lower side of the approach path 1133b, and is formed in such a size that the game ball T can flow down on both the left and right sides of the gate member 1134 disposed at the approximate center. In the gate space 1133c, a gate member 1134 is disposed at a position slightly to the right of the front view from directly below the entry path 1133b. The gate space 1133c is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered to the right side when viewed from the front, and the upper end of the guide path 1133d is opened at the lowest right end.

  The guide path 1133d extends in an arc shape along a portion extending vertically in the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111. As shown in FIG. 98 and the like, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the inner wall of the guide path 1133d, and the flow speed of the game ball T can be suppressed by the game ball T coming into contact with these protrusions. The guide path 1133d extends downward to about half the height of the gaming area 1100. The discharge port 1133e at the lower end of the guide path 1133d opens slightly to the left in front view.

[2-2. Schematic configuration of the prize opening unit]
The winning opening unit 1150 is arranged below the discharge port 1133e of the right channel 1133 in the center accessory 1130, and a general winning port 1151 that can always receive the game ball T, and a warp outlet 1132 of the center accessory 1130. A first start port 1152 that is disposed on the lower side and is capable of receiving the game ball T at all times, and a second start port that is disposed on the right side of the first start port 1152 in front view and is always open into the game area 1100. 1153, placed on the lower side of the first starting port 1152, and placed on the right side of the front view of the second starting port 1153, and a big winning port 1154 that allows the game ball T to be received by opening and closing according to the gaming state. The winning combination winning hole 1155 that allows the game ball T to be received by opening and closing depending on the gaming state and the winning combination winning hole 115 arranged below the winning combination winning hole 1155. Includes a V winning opening 1156 that is capable accepted, the game balls T received in.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 to 103, the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with the first starting port 1152 and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112 and the flat base plate 1160 attached to the front surface of the base plate 1160. A transparent front flow path forming member 1161 which is provided with a general winning opening 1151 and forms a flow path of the game ball T, and a transparent front surface attached to the front side of the front flow path forming member 1161 A decorative board 1162, an attacker unit 1200 that is disposed at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and that has a special winning opening 1154 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the front surface of the attacker unit 1200 The variable start position is located on the upper right side of the view and is provided with a second start port 1153 and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160. The accessory unit 1220 is disposed on the right side of the front unit 1210 and the variable start port unit 1210, and is provided with an accessory winning port 1155 and a V winning port 1156, and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160. And.

  Furthermore, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 and guides the game ball T received by the first starting port 1152 downward, and a first starting port guide member 1163, and a first starting port. The ball detection sensor 1164 which is attached to the guide member 1163 and detects the game ball T received in the first start port 1152 is disposed on the rear side of the first start port 1152, and the LED is mounted on the front surface. The first starter decorative board 1165, the board stay 1166 that supports the first starter decorative board 1165 and is attached to the first starter guide member 1163, and the base at the lower position of the attacker unit 1200. And a prize winning decoration board 1167 which is attached to the rear side of the plate 1160 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The winning opening unit 1150 is disposed on the rear side of the base plate 1160 and above the second starting port 1153, and includes a second starting port decoration board 1168 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a second starting port. A start opening reflector 1169 that covers the front side of the decorative substrate 1168 and is attached to the variable start opening unit 1210, and a second start opening 1153 that is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 at a position below the variable start opening unit 1210. The second starting port guide member 1170 for guiding the game ball T received in the first position downward, and the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 that is attached to the second starting port guide member 1170 is detected. A ball detection sensor (not shown), an attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 attached to the rear side of the second starting port guide member 1170, and A first relay board 1172 that relays the connection between the start opening solenoid 1215 of the start opening unit 1210 and the main control board 1113, and the rear side of the first relay board 1172 is attached to the rear side of the second start port guide member 1170. A substrate cover 1173.

  Furthermore, the prize opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the accessory unit 1220 and covers the rear side of the accessory unit 1220, and the accessory unit cover 1174 is located above the accessory winning opening 1155. A prize winning board decoration board 1175 arranged at the upper part of the front face and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, and a prize winning prize attached to the accessory unit cover 1174 that covers the front side of the winning prize prize decoration board 1175. The mouth reflector 1176, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the center of the front surface of the accessory unit cover 1174, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the accessory unit cover 1174, and the accessory winning solenoid 1225 of the accessory unit 1220. And the second relay that relays the connection between the V winning solenoid 1232 and the main control board 1113. A plate 1178, a general winning opening guide member 1179 that is attached to the rear side of the accessory unit cover 1174 and guides the game ball T received in the general winning opening 1151 downward, and a general winning opening guide member 1179. And a general winning port sensor 1180 (see FIG. 125) that detects the game ball T that is attached and received in the general winning port 1151.

  The base plate 1160 of the prize opening unit 1150 protrudes forward in the upper part of the left part when viewed from the front and is open at the top and rear and has a receiving part 1160a that forms a first starting port 1152, and a receiving part 1160a. An attacker opening portion 1160b that penetrates from the back to the front and extends from side to side and extends to the left and right and into which an after-mentioned winning opening opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 is inserted from the rear side, and an upper portion of the central portion in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A second starting port opening 1160c that penetrates back and forth and the second starting port 1153 faces the rear side, and extends from the second starting port opening 1160c to the left and right in the front and rear direction and extends in a slit shape. A door slit 1160d through which the front side of the start port member 1214 of the start port unit 1210 can pass, and the start port reflector 116 above the door slit 1160d. Comprises of a second start hole upper shelf emitting decorative unit 1160e emitted decorated on the left and right on the front side and a position by arrayed has been and second start hole LED decorative substrate 1168, the.

  Further, the base plate 1160 penetrates back and forth on the right side when viewed from the front of the second start opening upper shelf light emitting decoration portion 1160e, and forms an accessory winning port 1155 described later of the accessory winning unit 1220A in the accessory unit 1220. Of the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 are inserted so that the front portions protrude forward from the rear side, and the accessory winning port reflector 1176 is disposed above the accessory winning port opening 1160f. An accessory winning port light emitting decoration portion 1160g that is lined up on the left and right at the front side and is illuminated by the LEDs of the accessory winning port decoration board 1175, and penetrates back and forth below the accessory winning port opening 1160f. The ball guiding member 1238 (described later) of the V prize opening unit 1220B in the accessory unit 1220 is inserted so as to protrude forward from the rear side. The game ball T received in the general prize opening 1151 of the front flow path forming member 1161 in the shape of a bowl that extends rearward to the upper part of the right part of the front view and opened upward, and is opened upward. And a collar portion 1160i that is guided rearward and delivered to the general winning opening guide member 1179.

  The front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes into the front game area 1100 from the front surface of the flat plate 1160, and is formed in a shallow box shape with the flat front plate portion 1161a being open on the rear side. ing. The front flow path forming member 1161 has a receiving portion 1161b that is open at the upper right and rear in the front view and guides the game ball T received from the upper side to form a general winning opening 1151, and a receiving portion 1161b. From the right side of the receiving part 1161b to the left side of the extension line of the receiving part 1161b so that the left side is lower than the receiving part 1161b. 1161c, a receiving portion lower right wall 1161d that extends downward from the left end of the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c to the upper part of the prize winning hole 1155, and a left side from the receiving portion 1161b that is larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T. The position of the game ball T from the position of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning prize opening unit 1220A, which will be described later, below the receiving part lower shelf 1161c and above the bonus winning prize opening 1155. The receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e extending vertically to a position slightly higher than the left end of the receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e along the upper side of the accessory winning port 1155 and on the right side of the left end of the accessory winning port 1155. An accessory winning opening upper ceiling wall portion 1161f extending leftward to the upper side.

  Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is lowered to the left from a position in contact with the left end of the accessory winning port 1155 (the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221) at the lower left than the left end of the accessory winning port upper ceiling wall portion 1161f. An accessory winning opening left shelf 1161g that extends shortly, and a second starting opening region right standing wall 1161h that extends vertically from the right end of the accessory winning opening left shelf 1161g to the lower side of the second starting opening 1153; A second start port region lower shelf 1161i extending leftward from the lower end of the second start port region right standing wall 1161h to the left end of the front flow path forming member 1161.

  Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is separated from the second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161h to the left by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and from the upper surface of the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161g. The second starting port region lower shelf 1161i extends leftward from the center in the left-right direction to a position above the left side so that the left side becomes lower from a position that is lower than the outer diameter of T. The second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j disposed at a position directly above the second starting port 1153, and the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j hangs downward from the right end so as to cover the right side of the second starting port 1153. The second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k, the guide piece 1161l protruding leftward from the second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k, and the outer diameter of the game ball T from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j Than And a, a second start hole area left vertical wall 1161m extending vertically to a position downward from the upper position than the second start hole upper shelf portion 1161j are separated into slightly larger left.

  The winning opening unit 1150 of the present embodiment includes a ball detection sensor 1164 attached to the first start opening guide member 1163 and a ball detection sensor 1208 (described later) attached to the attacker unit 1200. A first start port sensor 1190 for detecting the game ball T received in 1152 is formed. Further, a ball detection sensor (not shown) attached to the second start port guide member 1170 and a ball detection sensor 1213 (described later) attached to the variable start port unit 1210 are received in the second start port 1153. A second start port sensor 1191 that detects the game ball T is formed.

  Further, although details will be described later, the winning opening unit 1150 is connected to a large winning port sensor 1206 for detecting the game ball T received in the large winning port 1154 of the attacker unit 1200 and an accessory winning port 1155 of the accessory unit 1220. A prize winning opening sensor 1224 for detecting the received game ball T and a V winning opening sensor 1239 for detecting the gaming ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 of the bonus unit 1220 are provided.

[2-2A. Attacker unit]
As shown mainly in FIGS. 104 to 106, the attacker unit 1200 of the winning opening unit 1150 includes a large winning opening 1154 that opens toward the front and extends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a large winning opening 1154. An attacker lower base 1201 that forms the lower part, an attacker upper base 1202 that is attached to the upper side of the attacker lower base 1201 and is attached to the base plate 1160 and that forms the upper part of the big prize opening 1154, and the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper part A large winning opening opening / closing member 1203 that is supported by a base 1202 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction and opens / closes the large winning opening 1154, and is attached between an attacker lower base 1201 and an attacker upper base 1202. And an plunger having a plunger 1204a that moves forward and backward according to the gaming state. A solenoid 1204, a link member 1205 that transmits the advance / retreat of the plunger 1204 a of the attacker solenoid 1204 to open and close the large winning opening / closing member 1203, and a game ball that is attached to the lower attacker base 1201 and received in the large winning opening 1154 A large winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting T, a guiding member 1207 attached to the lower side of the lower attacker base 1201 for guiding the game ball T detected by the large winning opening sensor 1206 to the rear, and an upper attacker 1202 And a ball detection sensor 1208 that is attached to the upper portion and detects the game ball T received by the first start port 1152.

  The big prize opening 1154 formed in the attacker unit 1200 is a horizontally long rectangular shape whose length in the left-right direction is 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball T and whose vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball T. The opening is opened and opened by a plate-shaped special prize opening / closing member 1203. The special prize opening 1154 is configured such that the special prize opening opening / closing member 1203 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis. This is a so-called variable prize opening that allows the game ball T to be received when the big prize opening opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially horizontal state.

  An attacker lower base 1201 of the attacker unit 1200 is arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and extends vertically through a horizontally long box-shaped storage unit 1201a opened front and top, and a bottom wall of the storage unit lower 1201a. A through hole 1201b through which the sphere T can pass, a sensor support hole 1201c that is formed below the through hole 1201b and into which the big prize opening sensor 1206 is inserted from the rear side, and a lower front side at both left and right ends of the storage unit lower 1201a A pair of bearing portions 1201d arranged below, a solenoid support portion 1201e formed on the rear side of the right side of the lower portion 1201a, and a U-shape formed on the front side of the solenoid support portion 1201e and on the right side of the lower portion 1201a. The supporting shaft 1201f is formed on the rear side of the storage portion 1201a at the center in the left-right direction. And a, a passage hole 1201g that over can penetrate vertically.

  The lower housing portion 1201a of the lower attacker base 1201 forms the lower half of the special winning opening 1154, and is inclined so that the bottom wall becomes lower toward the through hole 1201b. The pair of lower bearing portions 1201d is for rotatably supporting the prize winning opening / closing member 1203 in cooperation with a later-described bearing upper portion 1202b of the attacker upper base 1202. The shaft support 1201f can support the link member 1205 by inserting the rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 from above. The passing hole 1201g is passed through the through hole 1202e of the upper attacker base 1202 that is received by the first starting port 1152 and passes through the game ball T.

  The attacker upper base 1202 of the attacker unit 1200 is disposed on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the horizontally long box-shaped accommodation unit 1202a that is open front and lower, and on the lower front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the accommodation unit 1202a. A pair of bearing portions 1202b, a shaft hole 1202c through which the rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is inserted in the front and rear sides on the right side of the housing portion 1202a, and an upper rear side of the housing portion 1202a. A sensor support portion 1202d into which the ball detection sensor 1208 is inserted from above, and a through hole 1202e through which the game ball T passes vertically so as to allow passage through the right portion of the sensor support portion 1202d. .

  The upper portion 1202a of the upper attacker base 1202 cooperates with the lower portion 1201a of the lower attacker base 1201 to form a big prize opening 1154. The pair of upper bearing portions 1202b cooperate with the lower bearing portion 1201d of the lower attacker base 1201 to rotatably support the special prize opening opening / closing member 1203. The shaft hole 1202c is for rotatably supporting a rotation shaft 1205a (described later) of the link member 1205. Through the through hole 1202e, the game ball T received by the first start port 1152 and detected by the ball detection sensor 1208 passes.

  The prize winning opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a flat door 1203a extending to the left and right, a pair of shaft pins 1203b extending outward from the lower left and right ends of the door 1203a, and the door 1203a. And a working pin 1203c projecting rightward from a position obliquely below the right end side shaft pin 1203b.

  The door portion 1203a of the big prize opening / closing member 1203 is formed to have a size capable of closing the big prize opening 1154 formed by the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202. The pair of shaft pins 1203b are rotatably supported by a pair of bearing lower portions 1201d and a pair of bearing upper portions 1202b of the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202, respectively. The action pin 1203c is inserted between a pair of operating pins 1205c described later of the link member 1205.

  The attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 is supported between the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202 in a state where the plunger 1204a is inserted into the solenoid support portion 1201e of the lower attacker base 1201 so that the plunger 1204a advances and retreats from the right end side. . The plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 has a disc shape at the tip. The attacker solenoid 1204 includes a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1204a protrudes due to the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1205 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a rotating shaft 1205a extending in the front-rear direction, an engaging portion 1205b protruding rearward from a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 1205a, and a rotating shaft 1205a. A pair of actuating pins 1205c projecting forward from a position deviated from the axis of the shaft. The rotation shaft 1205 a of the link member 1205 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 1201 f of the lower attacker base 1201 and the shaft hole 1202 c of the upper attacker base 1202. The engaging portion 1205b is formed with a notch into which the disc-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a in the attacker solenoid 1204 is inserted. The action pin 1203c of the big prize opening / closing member 1203 is inserted between the pair of operation pins 1205c.

  In this link member 1205, the engagement portion 1205 b is mainly moved in the left-right direction with the relationship between the engagement portion 1205 b and the pair of operation pins 1205 c being attached to the lower attacker base 1201 and the upper attacker base 1202. The pair of operating pins 1205c are arranged so as to move mainly in the vertical direction. The link member 1205 rotates in the clockwise direction when the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 moves from the protruding state to the immersive direction (left direction in front view).

  The guide member 1207 of the attacker unit 1200 is formed in a box shape whose upper and rear sides are open, and is attached to the lower side of the attacker lower base 1201 below the through hole 1201b.

  In the normal state of the attacker unit 1200 of the present embodiment, the plunger 1204a protrudes rightward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the upper operating pin 1205c of the pair of operating pins 1205c is in contact with the operating pin 105c of the big prize opening / closing member 1203 from above, and the flat door 1203a is in an upright state. The grand prize opening 1154 is closed. That is, the game ball T cannot be received in the special winning opening 1154.

  In the attacker unit 1200, when the attacker solenoid 1204 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 1204a moves to the left and enters a state of being immersed except for the disc-shaped tip. By the movement of the plunger 1204a in the left direction, the engaging portion 1205b of the link member 1205 engaged with the disc-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a revolves so as to move in the left direction, and the link member 1205 rotates. It rotates clockwise around the moving shaft 1205a.

  When the link member 1205 rotates clockwise, the pair of operating pins 1205c revolves so as to move upward, and the upper operating pin 1205c moves upward from the action pin 1203c of the big prize opening opening / closing member 1203. The lower operation pin 1205c comes into contact with the action pin 1203c from the lower side and further moves the action pin 1203c upward. Then, the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 rotates so that the upper end moves forward about the shaft pin 1203b, and the flat door 1203a becomes substantially horizontal. As a result, the special winning opening 1154 is opened, and the game ball T can be received into the special winning opening 1154.

[2-2B. Variable start port unit]
The variable start port unit 1210 of the winning port unit 1150 includes a second start port 1153 that opens forward in the front right part of the front view as shown mainly in FIGS. The second start port 1153 is formed in a size that allows only one game ball T to pass therethrough. The variable start port unit 1210 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 1211 that is open on the front and upper sides, a box-shaped upper case 1212 that is attached to the upper side of the lower case 1211 and that is partially open on the front and opened on the lower side. A ball detection sensor 1213 that is attached to the lower case 1211 and detects the game ball T received in the second start port 1153, a start port door member 1214 that is slidably supported by the lower case 1211, and a lower case A start port solenoid 1215 having a plunger 1215a supported between 1211 and the upper case 1212 and moving back and forth in accordance with the gaming state, and the start and stop of the start port door member 1214 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 The sliding position of the link member 1216 to be slid and the start door member 1214 is detected. A slide detection sensor 1217 that includes a.

  The lower case 1211 of the variable start port unit 1210 is formed in a state of being inclined so as to be lowered from the front side toward the rear side at the position of the right part of the upper surface, and a ball guiding part 1211a capable of guiding the game ball T; A through hole 1211b that passes vertically through the rear end side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and allows the game ball T to pass therethrough, and is opened forward on the lower side of the ball guiding portion 1211a. The ball detection sensor 1213 supports insertion. A sensor support hole 1211c, a pair of slide grooves 1211d that are formed at the center in the left-right direction and face each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and a columnar support pin 1211e that protrudes upward from the left portion of the top surface It is equipped with.

  The upper case 1212 of the variable start port unit 1210 has a passage upper portion 1212a which is open at the front right portion of the front face and is inclined so that the upper wall becomes lower as it goes rearward. In the case 1212, a second start opening decoration is formed between a front end opening forming portion 1212 b that forms a lower surface on the front end side on the left side in front of the passage upper portion 1212 a and a base plate 1160 formed above the front end opening forming portion 1212 b. A substrate post-holding portion 1212c that sandwiches the substrate 1168 and the start-port reflector 1169; a solenoid cover portion 1212d that is formed on the rear side of the substrate post-pressing portion 1212c and the front end opening forming portion 1212b and covers the start-port solenoid 1215 from above; It has.

  The upper passage portion 1212a of the upper case 1212 forms a second start port 1153 at a position above the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b in the lower case 1211. The upper portion 1212a of the passage is formed in a U shape with the opening facing downward, and the right side extends downward longer than the left side. Further, the passage upper portion 1212a can guide the game ball T backward by cooperating with the ball guiding portion 1211a.

  The front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212 has a front end formed at the same position as the front end of the passage upper portion 1212a in the front-rear direction. Further, the front end opening forming portion 1212b extends in a plate shape from the front end to the vicinity of the center of the upper case 1212 in the front-rear direction. The front end opening forming portion 1212b has a shape in a front view that is 1/3 of the height of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a at a small angle (about 5 degrees) from the vicinity of the lower left end of the passage upper portion 1212a to the left. After extending diagonally to the height of the passageway, it extends further to the left at the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a at a large angle (about 45 degrees) with respect to the horizontal, and further extends horizontally to the left from there, and then the passage upper portion. 1212a is formed in a shape extending downward to a height intermediate between the lower end of the left side and the lower end of the right side.

  In other words, the front end opening forming portion 1212b has a front shape that extends upward from the vicinity of the left end at the lower end of the upper case 1212 to the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a, extends horizontally from the upper end to the right, and then extends to the lower right. It extends from the lower end of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a to a height of about 1/3 of the height of the left side at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and further, the right side is lowered from there to the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the upper passage portion 1212a. So as to extend diagonally long. A first guide portion 1214a, a second guide portion 1214b, a third guide portion 1214c, and the like of the start port door member 1214 are disposed below the front end opening forming member 112b and the passage upper portion 1212a.

  The start port member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 includes a flat plate-like first guide portion 1214a extending obliquely toward the lower right in front view (an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal), and a first guide portion. A flat plate-like second guide portion 1214b extending obliquely from the right end of 1214a to the lower right of the front view at a smaller angle (about 5 degrees) than the first guide portion 1214a with respect to the horizontal, and the second guide portion 1214b A flat plate-like third guide portion 1214c that is provided on a right side of the right end and lower than the right end of the second guide portion 1214b and is inclined to be lowered rearward, and a front end of the third guide portion 1214c The front wall portion 1214d extending to the same height as the right end of the second guide portion 1214b, and the flat standing wall portion 12 extending upward from the right end of the third guide portion 1214c to the upper side of the front wall portion 1214d. Includes a 4e, the.

  Further, the start door member 1214 includes a hanging part 1214f extending downward from the rear end of the second guide part 1214b, a flat slider part 1214g extending backward from the lower end of the hanging part 1214f, and a slider A cylindrical connecting pin 1214h protruding from the upper surface of the portion 1214g and a detecting portion 1214i formed at the rear end of the slider portion 1214g are provided.

  The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e of the start door member 1214 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The width of the first guide portion 1214a and the like in the front-rear direction is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T. Further, the left and right lengths of the start door member 1214 (the length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a to the right end of the standing wall portion 1214e) are formed to be about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T. Has been. Further, the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view are formed to be about 2/3 times the outer diameter of the game ball T. The first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b are disposed below the front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212. The third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e are disposed between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212.

  The slider portion 1214g of the start door member 1214 is inserted into the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211 at both left and right ends. Thus, the start port door member 1214 is supported by the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211 so as to be slidable back and forth. The connection pin 1214h is slidably inserted into a connection hole 1216e (described later) of the link member 1216, thereby being connected to the link member 1216, and the advance / retreat of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 is transmitted. The detection unit 1214 i can be detected by a slide detection sensor 1217.

  The start port solenoid 1215 of the variable start port unit 1210 is supported in the solenoid covering portion 1212d of the upper case 1212 between the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a advances and retreats from the left end side. The plunger 1215a of the start-up solenoid 1215 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at the tip. In addition, the start-up solenoid 1215 includes a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1215a protrudes (extends) due to the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1216 of the variable start port unit 1210 includes a cylindrical main body 1216a that is rotatably fitted to the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 and a first piece 1216b that extends outward from the main body 1216a. And an engaging portion 1216c that protrudes upward from the tip of the first piece 1216b and can be engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215, and the direction in which the first piece 1216b extends from the main body 1216a. A second piece 1216d extending at a right angle longer than the first piece 1216b and extending vertically in the tip of the second piece 1216d and extending in the same direction as the second piece 1216d extending. A connecting hole 1216e having a long hole shape into which the connecting pin 1214h of the cage start door member 1214 is slidably inserted from below. There.

  The first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 extends in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the main body 1216a from the upper end of the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216d extends at a right angle in the clockwise direction with respect to the first piece 1216b in a plan view from the lower side of the first piece 1216b in the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216d is formed in such a length that the tip is located near the center in the left-right direction of the lower case 1211 in a state where the main body 1216a is fitted into the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211.

  As shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the variable start port unit 1210 is configured such that the slider portion 1214g of the start port door member 1214 is positioned below the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. And a starting port solenoid 1215 is disposed on the upper side of the slider portion 1214g on the rear side of the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b so as to be horizontally long. On the lower side, the link member 1216 transmits the advance / retreat of the plunger 1215 a to the start port door member 1214. Thereby, the distance (size) in the front-rear direction of the variable start port unit 1210 can be made as small as possible. Therefore, the space on the rear side of the variable start port unit 1210 can be relatively widened.

  In a normal state (a state where the start port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the variable start port unit 1210 of the present embodiment has a plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 protruding leftward by a biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, as shown in FIG. 112, the engaging portion 1216c at the tip of the first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 is located on the left side of the center of the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 and the first piece 1216b. The connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending at a right angle to the clockwise direction is located on the rear side of the center of the support pin 1211e. The start door member 1214 provided with the connecting pin 1214h inserted into the connecting hole 1216e of the link member 1216 has a front end substantially coinciding with the front surface of the base plate 1160. That is, the start port door member 1214 is in a state of being immersed (retracted) from the game area 1100 (a state of an unacceptable position). In this normal state, the detection unit 1214 i of the start door member 1214 is detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  When the start opening solenoid 1215 is energized in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134 of the center accessory 1130, the variable start opening unit 1210 enters the plunger 1215a in the right direction. (See FIG. 113). When the plunger 1215a of the start-up solenoid 1215 moves to the right and is immersed, the entire link member 1216 is viewed in plan with the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 as the center by the engaging portion 1216c engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a. Rotate clockwise.

  By rotating the link member 1216 in the clockwise direction, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d moves so as to move relatively forward, and is inserted into the connecting hole 1216e. The connecting pin 1214h of the starting port door member 1214 is pushed forward by the inner surface of the connecting hole 1216e, and the starting port door member 1214 slides forward as a whole. Accordingly, the front end of the start port door member 1214 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the front wall portion 1214d of the start port door member 1214. , And the standing wall portion 1214e appear in the game area 1100 (the state of the receivable position). In a state where the start port door member 1214 is slid forward and appears in the game area 1100, the detection portion 1214 i of the start port door member 1214 is not detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  When the game ball T flows down on the first guide portion 1214a with the start door member 1214 appearing in the game area 1100, the first guide portion 1214a rolls to the right due to the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a, and the second guide portion 1214b. Sent up. Then, the game ball T sent to the second guide portion 1214b is further rolled to the right by the inclination of the second guide portion 1214b, and to the third guide portion 1214c arranged on the right side of the second guide portion 1214b. Sent.

  Since the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, the direction of the game ball T sent to the third guide portion 1214c changes to the rear, and the third guide portion 1214c rolls backward. It is sent from the rear end of the third guide portion 1214c between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the rear lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212. That is, the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153. At this time, in the start port door member 1214, the right end of the third guide portion 1214c is provided with an upright wall portion 1214e that is about half the height of the outer diameter of the game ball T. The game ball T rolling from the left direction to the third guide portion 1214c comes into contact with the standing wall portion 1214e and is prevented from rolling to the right side of the third guide portion 1214c. In addition, the game ball T that has been rolled from the left to the third guide portion 1214c can also be rolled backward by the guide piece 11611l of the front flow path forming member 1161.

  The game ball T released backward from the third guide portion 1214c flows down onto the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 disposed on the lower side of the third guide portion 1214c, and is guided to the ball guide portion 1211a. Then, the ball enters the passage hole 1211b opened at the rear end of the ball guiding portion 1211a, is detected by the ball detection sensor 1213, and is sent to the second start port guide member 1170.

[2-2C. Schematic configuration of accessory unit]
The accessory unit 1220 of the prize opening unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. The accessory unit 1220 includes an accessory winning port 1155 that allows the game ball T to be received according to a special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball T into the first start port 1152 and the second start port 1153. The prize winning port unit 1220A, and the game ball T received in the prize winning port 1155 of the prize winning unit 1220A can be distributed, and the V winning slot 1156 that can receive the game ball T by distribution is provided. V prize opening unit 1220B.

[2-2C1. Award winning unit]
An accessory winning unit 1220A of the accessory unit 1220 supports an accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 for opening and closing the accessory winning port 1155, and an accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. An upper housing 1222 that divides the left and right ends of the mouth 1155, a lower housing 1223 that is attached to the lower side of the upper housing 1222 and that receives the game ball T received by the prize winning opening 1155, and is attached to the lower housing 1223 An accessory prize winning port sensor 1224 for detecting the game ball T received in the cage winning prize winning slot 1155, and a plunger 1225a supported between the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 and moving forward and backward according to the gaming state are provided. The prize winning solenoid 1225 of the accessory and the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 of the accessory A link member 1226 that slides the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 by transmitting the withdrawal, and an opening / closing detection sensor 1227 that detects opening / closing of the prize winning opening 1155 by detecting the movement of the link member 1226 are provided. .

  The prize winning opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A has a flat door 1212a extending in the left and right directions with a constant width and inclined so that the left side in front view is lowered, and the door An extending piece 1221b extending rearward from the rear end of the center in the left-right direction of 1221a, and a connecting hole 1221c penetrating vertically near the front end of the extending piece 1221b and extending left and right. .

  The upper housing 1222 of the prize winning port unit 1220A has a box-shaped upper housing body 1222a in which a prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is placed on the upper surface and the lower side is opened, and the front from the left and right ends at the front end of the upper housing body 1222a. A pair of flat partition pieces 1222b projecting upward and downward and front and rear, and left and right ends of the upper front portion of the upper housing main body 1222a are formed at the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221. A pair of groove-like first support portions 1222c that slidably support the upper housing body 1222c between the pair of first support portions 1222c and an opening 1222d that extends vertically and extends back and forth. An extension piece formed in the upper rear portion of the upper housing main body 1222a and in the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 A groove-shaped pair of second support portion 1222e of the left and right ends of 221b slidably supported, and a. In the upper housing 1222, the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a and the upper surfaces of the pair of first support portions 122b coincide.

  The lower housing 1223 of the prize winning unit 1220A has a box shape with the upper side open, and extends to the left and right at the front side of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 with the same length as the interval between the pair of partition pieces 1222b. A ball receiving portion 1223a that is lowered toward the left and lowered toward the rear near the left end, a notch 1223b that is formed at the rear of the left end of the ball receiving portion 1223a and through which the game ball T can pass, and a notch 1223b A sensor support portion 1223c, which is formed in a shallow box shape that is formed on the rear side and the lower side and is open on the upper side, and in which the accessory winning award sensor 1224 is fitted, and a bottom wall of the sensor support portion 1223c penetrates vertically. A discharge port 1223d through which a game ball detected by the winning port sensor 1224 can pass and a right rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a A box-shaped solenoid housing portion 1223e in which an accessory winning solenoid 1225 is housed, and a left side of the solenoid housing portion 1223e (a central rear side in the left-right direction of the ball receiving portion 1223a). A link accommodating portion 1223f that accommodates rotatably.

  The prize winning solenoid 1225 of the prize winning unit 1220A is accommodated and supported in the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e of the lower housing 1223 so that the plunger 1225a advances and retreats from the front end side. The plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 is formed in a disk shape with a large diameter at the tip. The prize winning solenoid 1225 includes a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1225a protrudes (extends) due to the urging force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1226 of the prize winning unit 1220A is rotatably supported at the bottom of the link housing portion 1223f of the lower housing 1223 and extends to the left and right, and the upper housing 1222 extends from the rotating shaft 1226a. A band plate-like collar portion 1226b that extends to the upper side of the upper surface of the upper housing main body 1222a through the opening 1222d of the upper portion, and a columnar shape that is formed in a column shape that extends to the left and right at the upper end of the collar portion 1226b. A connecting portion 1226c inserted into the connecting hole 1221c of the opening / closing member 1221 from the lower side, and protrudes to the right at a position closer to the lower side from the upper and lower center of the flange portion 1226b and engages with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 Engaging portion 1226d between the engaging portion 1226d of the flange portion 1226b and the rotating shaft portion 1226a. And a, a detection piece 1226e detected by and close detection sensor 1227 extends to put al rearward.

  In the normal state (when no power is supplied), the winning combination winning unit 1220A of the present embodiment is such that the plunger 1225a of the winning combination solenoid 1225 protrudes forward by the biasing force of the coil spring, and the tip of the plunger 1225a Due to the engaging portion 126e of the link member 1226 engaged with, the flange portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is in a state of rising substantially vertically from the rotating shaft portion 1226a. In this state, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 having the connection hole 1221c into which the connection portion 1226c at the upper end of the flange portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is inserted is pushed forward by the connection portion 1226c through the connection hole 1221c. As a result, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is slid forward.

  Thereby, the door part 1221a of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 protrudes forward from the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222, and the front end of the door part 1221a is substantially the same as the front end of the partition piece 1222b of the upper housing 1222. Is in position. In addition, the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning award opening / closing member 1221 are in contact with the upper surfaces of the pair of partition pieces 1222b that are spaced apart from each other in the upper housing 1222. Therefore, the prize winning opening 1155 opened upward is closed by the door 1221a of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 and the game ball T cannot be received (FIG. 124 (b). ) Etc.). In this state, the game ball T flowing down on the door portion 1221a rolls leftward and is discharged leftward from the left end of the door portion 1221a according to the door portion 1221a inclined so that the left side is lowered. The In a state in which the prize winning opening 1155 is closed by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226 e of the link member 1226 is detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 1227.

  When the bonus winning unit 1220A is energized to the bonus winning solenoid 1225 in accordance with a special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball T is received at the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153, the plunger 1225a Move backwards to immerse. When the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 moves rearward, the engaging portion 126c of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a is pulled backward. Thereby, the link member 1226 rotates in the direction in which the upper end of the flange portion 1226b moves rearward around the rotation shaft portion 1226a. And since the connection part 1226c of the upper end of the collar part 1226b will move back, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 will slide back through the connection hole 1221c in which the connection part 1226c is inserted. .

  At this time, the engagement portion 1226d of the link member 1226 that is engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 has the length (height) of the flange portion 1226b extending from the rotation shaft portion 1226a. Since the rotation shaft portion 1226a is arranged at the center rather than the center, the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the flange portion 1226b largely moves backward with respect to the movement amount of the plunger 1225a backward. Accordingly, the front end of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door part 1221a) moves to the vicinity of the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 (near the rear ends of the pair of partition pieces 1222b), and the prize winning opening 1155 The game ball T is opened upward to be able to receive the game ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). In a state where the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226 e of the link member 1226 is not detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 1227.

  When the game winning ball opening / closing member 1221 is retracted and the bonus game winning port 1155 is opened and ready to be received, and the game ball T is received in the bonus game winning port 1155, the gaming ball T It passes between the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the housing 1222 and flows down onto the ball receiving portion 1223a of the lower housing 1223, and rolls left on the ball receiving portion 1223a due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 1223a. Then, the ball receiving portion 1223a is discharged from the rear left notch 1223b to the rear, and is detected by the accessory prize port sensor 1224 supported on the lower side behind the notch 1223b. From the discharge port 1223d of 1223, it discharges | emits on the ball | bowl inlet 1238d of the ball | bowl guide member 1238 mentioned later of the V prize port unit 1220B below.

[2-2C2. V prize opening unit]
The V prize slot unit 1220B of the accessory unit 1220 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 below the accessory prize slot unit 1220A and has a unit front base 1230 in which a V prize slot 1156 is formed, and a unit front base 1230. A rear unit base 1231 attached to the rear side, a V-winning solenoid 1232 having a plunger 1232a that is sandwiched between the front unit base 1230 and the rear unit base 1231 and moves forward and backward according to the gaming state; A drive gear member 1233 that is rotatably supported by the front unit base 1230 on the rear side and rotates by the advancement and retraction of the plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232, a driven gear member 1234 that meshes with the drive gear member 1233, and a driven gear member 1234. The rear end is mounted in the center of Front while being rotatably supported by and unit before the base 1230 is provided with a shaft member 1235 which projects forward from the unit before the base 1230.

  The V prize opening unit 1220B is disposed on the front surface of the unit front base 1230 and is attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235, and includes a receiving portion 1236a capable of receiving only one game ball T on the peripheral surface. A columnar rotating body 1236, a disk-shaped rotating body front plate 1237 attached to the front surface of the rotating body 1236, and a front part of the unit front base 1230 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 And a ball guiding member 1238 for guiding the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 1223d of the mouth unit 1220A to the upper outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and guiding the game ball T from the rotating body 1236 to the V winning opening 1156. .

  Further, the V prize opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a pair of V prize opening sensors 1239 for detecting the game ball T received in the V prize opening 1156 and the rear of the unit front base 1230. A V lose sensor 1240 that detects a game ball T that is attached to the side and received in the prize winning opening 1155 but not received in the V winning opening 1156, and a rotation that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 1231. A rotation detection sensor 1241 for detecting the rotation position of the body 1236.

  The unit front base 1230 of the V prize opening unit 1220B has a front surface 1230a in which the V prize opening 1156 penetrates back and forth on the right side in front of the center with a flat surface extending vertically and horizontally, and near the center of the front surface part 1230a. And a bearing hole 1230b for pivotally supporting the shaft member 1235, and a loss hole 1230c that penetrates forward and backward on the bearing hole 1230b and allows the game ball T to pass therethrough. .

  The unit front base 1230 is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a, guides the game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156i downward, and opens the rear side of the first discharge path 1230d and the front surface portion 1230a. A second discharge path 1230e that is formed on the rear surface and that guides the game ball T that has passed through the lost hole 1230c downward and is open on the rear side, and is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a and above the first discharge path 1230d. And a solenoid accommodating portion 1230f in which a cage V winning solenoid 1232 is accommodated. A pair of V prize opening sensors 1239 are attached in the first discharge path 1230d. A V-loss sensor 1240 is attached in the second discharge path 1230e. The opened rear side of the first discharge path 1230d, the second discharge path 1230e, and the solenoid housing portion 1230f is closed by the unit rear base 1231.

  The V winning solenoid 1232 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating portion 1230f of the unit front base 1230 so that the plunger 1232a advances and retreats from the lower end side. The plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 is formed in a disk shape having a large diameter at the tip. Further, the V winning solenoid 1232 includes a coil spring (not shown) that biases the plunger 1232a in a protruding direction, and the plunger 1232a protrudes downward when the coil spring is not energized.

  The drive gear member 1233 of the V prize opening unit 1220B extends in the front-rear direction and has a shaft portion 1233a that is rotatably supported on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a plate-like shape extending from the shaft portion 1233a in a direction perpendicular to the shaft. An extension piece 1233b, a drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension piece 1233b and extending in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft portion 1233a, and projecting forward from the front surface of the extension piece 1233b and receiving a V prize An engaging portion 1233d that engages with the tip of the plunger 1232a of the solenoid 1232.

  The driven gear member 1234 of the V prize opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear end of the shaft member 1235, extends in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is a driven gear 1234a that meshes with the drive gear of the drive gear member 1233. , And a detection piece 1234b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the rear surface of the driven gear 1234a. The driven gear 1234a extending in the arc shape in the driven gear member 1234 has a pitch diameter of about 1/3 of the pitch diameter of the driving gear 1233c extending in the arc shape in the driving gear member 1233. Yes.

  The rotating body 1236 of the V prize opening unit 1220B is formed with a receiving portion 1236a capable of accommodating only one game ball T opened to the front and the outer periphery. In the front view, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 extends in a direction in which two sides (two sides spaced apart in the circumferential direction) from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side move away from each other toward the outer periphery. Specifically, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is opened upward, the center line passing through the center of the rotating body 1236 and the center of the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a is on the left side of the front view. While the sides extend in parallel, the right side extends away from the bottom side toward the outer peripheral side (see FIG. 120 (a)). The radius of the rotating body 1236 is about 1.6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  In addition, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is formed to be approximately equal to the outer diameter of the game ball T from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side (see FIG. 124 (a)). In addition, the receiving portion 1236a has a rear wall notched from the outer peripheral surface to the bottom side, and is formed lower than two sides that are separated in the circumferential direction. In addition, the receiving portion 1236a includes an inclined portion 1236b that is inclined obliquely on the front side (inner side) of the rear wall so as to be directed rearward as it goes upward (away from the rotation axis). When the game ball T flowing down from above comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b, the game ball T is guided forward to be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a, and the receiving portion 1236a is received when the game ball T is received. The impact acting on the bottom of the can be reduced. Further, the opened front end side of the receiving portion 1236 a in the rotating body 1236 is closed by the rotating body front plate 1237. Accordingly, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can allow the game ball T to be taken in and out only from the outside in the radial direction of the rotating body 1236.

  The ball guiding member 1238 of the V prize opening unit 1220B is formed by cutting a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and an upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a so that the game ball T can pass therethrough. 1238b and a right part mouth 1238c that is formed by notching the right part of the peripheral wall part 1238a in front view (position of 90 degrees in the clockwise direction in front view with respect to the upper part 1238b) and through which a game ball can pass. A ball inlet 1238d that is disposed directly above the peripheral wall 1238a and immediately below the outlet 1223d of the lower housing 1223 in the accessory prize winning unit 1220A and opens upward, and from the ball inlet 1238d toward the upper opening 1238b. An upper guiding portion 1238e that is lowered and bent in a crank shape so that the game ball T can be circulated, and a right mouth 123 Front view lower right V game ball T has become lower toward the winning opening 1156 is provided with a right guiding section 1238f allowing flow c. From

  The ball guiding member 1238 is open at the rear end sides of the upper guiding portion 1238e and the right guiding portion 1238f, and is attached to the unit front base 1230, whereby the rear end side opened by the front surface portion 1230a is closed.

  In the V prize opening unit 1220B of the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 is supported on the unit front base 1230 so as to be rotatable at a position slightly above the vertical center near the right end in front view. On the other hand, the shaft member 1235 to which the driven gear member 1234 and the rotating body 1236 are attached is attached to the unit base 1230 so as to be rotatable at a position slightly to the left of the front view center. The drive gear 1233c of the drive gear member 1233 and the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 are engaged between the shaft portion 1233a and the shaft member 1235 of the drive gear member 1233, and the V winning solenoid 1232 is disposed. Has been.

  The V prize opening unit 1220B is below the center of the rotating body 1236, and the V prize opening 1156 is opened forward at a position directly below the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233.

  Energization / non-energization of the V winning solenoid 1232 is performed at a constant cycle under the control of the main control board 1113. When the V winning solenoid 1232 is in a non-energized state, the plunger 1232a protrudes downward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 is pushed downward by the plunger 1232a protruding downward, and the driving gear member 1233 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portion 1233a. In the vicinity of the end of the gear 1233c in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the end of the driven gear member 1234 is engaged with the vicinity of the end of the driven gear 1234a in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 120B). At this time, the detection piece 1234b of the driven gear member 1234 extends upward with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is detected by the rotation detection sensor 1241.

  Then, the rotating member 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 faces the open side of the receiving portion 1236a to the right in the front view by the shaft member 1235 having the rear end side attached to the driven gear member 1234. It is in the state of the release position. In this state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is coincident with the right port 1238c of the ball guiding member 1238, and the receiving portion 1236a and the right guiding portion 1238f are in a state of being built. Further, the upper opening 1238 b of the ball guiding member 1238 is in a state of being closed by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236.

  Thus, when a game ball is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game ball is guided from the receiving portion 1236a to the V winning opening 1156 through the right port 1238c and the right guiding portion 1238f. The game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 is guided downward by the first discharge path 1230d on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and is detected by the pair of V winning opening sensors 1239, and the first discharge path 1230d. It is discharged downward from the lower end of.

  On the other hand, the game ball T that has been received by the accessory prize winning opening 1155 of the accessory winning prize opening unit 120B and reached the upper opening 1238b through the ball inlet 1238d and the upper guiding portion 1238e of the ball guiding member 1238 is the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236. The surface and the peripheral wall portion 1238a prevent the receiving portion 1236a from being received, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236 that is inclined so that the rear end side is narrowed opens the lower rear portion of the upper guiding portion 1238e. The unit front base 1230 enters the loss hole 1230c of the front surface portion 1230a, is guided downward by the second discharge path 1230e on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, is detected by the V loss sensor 1240, and is detected by the second discharge path 1230e. It is discharged downward from the lower end of.

  In a state where the V winning solenoid 1232 is energized, the plunger 1232a rises so as to be immersed against the urging force of the coil spring. As the plunger 1232a rises, the driving gear member 1233 rotates clockwise around the shaft 1233a by the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 engaged with the tip (lower end) of the plunger 1232a. Move. By rotating the drive gear member 1233 clockwise, the driven gear member 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 meshed with the drive gear 1233c causes the entire driven gear member 1234 to rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise around the shaft member 1235. Rotate. Accordingly, the rotating body 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 also rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front via the shaft member 1235 attached to the driven gear member 1234 on the rear end side. Become.

  Then, the rotating body 1236 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise, so that the receiving portion 1236a is opened upward, and the opening side of the receiving portion 1236a is in the accommodation position where it coincides with the upper port 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238. It becomes a state. Thereby, the receiving part 1236a will be in the state connected with the upper guide part 1238e via the upper opening 1238b (refer Fig.120 (a)).

  With the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 facing upward, when the game ball is discharged from the prize winning unit 1220A side and enters the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, the upper portion passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e. It is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 from the mouth 1238b. In the state where the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, when the game ball further enters the ball entrance 138b, the entered game ball T passes through the upper guide portion 1238e and is received by the rotating body 1236. After coming into contact with the game ball T received by the portion 1236a from above, it enters the gap hole 1230c opened to the rear side, and is discharged downward through the second discharge portion 130e of the unit front base 1230. The

  At this time, the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is supported by the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a and does not come off the receiving portion 1236a even if the game ball T abuts from above. . Further, the center of the upper opening 1238b (the center in the front-rear direction of the upper guiding portion 1238e) is formed slightly behind the center of the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. As a result, another game ball T coming later comes into contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. The game ball T can be guided to the rear where the loss hole 1230c is located, and another game ball T that has come later can be reliably discharged downward from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

[3-1. Game contents]
The game content using the game ball T in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player operates the handle device 500 to drive the game balls T stored in the dish unit 300 one by one into the upper part of the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can do. The game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 flows down so as to pass through either the left or right of the center bonus 1130 and is discharged from an out port 1112a that opens at the lower end of the game area 1100. In the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails G, a windmill, a decorative body including a center accessory 1130, and the like are arranged. The game ball T abuts the obstacle nail G and the like, and the flow speed is suppressed. At the same time, it is moved in various directions so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T.

  Further, when the game ball T is received in the general winning opening 1151, the first starting opening 1152, the second starting opening 1153, the big winning opening 1154, the winning combination winning opening 1155, etc., which are arranged in the gaming area 1100, the receiving is accepted. The number of game balls T corresponding to the winning award is paid out to the dish unit 300. Note that the game balls T discharged from the out port 1112a, the general winning port 1151, the first starting port 1152, the second starting port 1153, the big winning port 1154, and the prize winning port 1155 are not returned to the player.

  When the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows down from the upper part of the center game 1130 to the left, it flows down between the center game 1130 and the guide wall 1111c in the game area 1100. Become. At this time, when the game ball T enters the warp inlet 1131 opened on the left outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 1130, the game is again played from the warp outlet 1132 opened at the lower center of the center accessory 1130 in the left-right direction. Released into region 1100. Immediately below the warp outlet 1132, the first starting port 1152 in the prize opening unit 1150 is always open upward, and the game ball T released from the warp outlet 1132 has a very high probability of being the first starting port. 1152 is accepted.

  Further, even when the game ball T flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1130 does not enter the warp entrance 1131, the plurality of obstacle nails G lower the center accessory 1130 toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. Therefore, the first start port 1152 may be accepted.

  When the game ball T is received at the first start port 1152, the game ball T is detected by the first start port sensor 1190, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 1113. The main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 by a detection signal from the first start port sensor 1190, and the payout control board 1101 controls the prize ball device 740 to respond to the payout command received. A number (for example, three) of game balls T are paid out to the dish unit 300.

  The game ball T that flows down the left side of the center accessory 1130 and is not received in the first start port 1152 is discharged from the out port 1112a at the lower end of the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows down from the upper part of the center accessory 1130 in the right direction, the game ball T enters the right flow path 1133 from the entrance 1133a of the center accessory 1130, and the game area It is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 1133e arranged at the approximate center in the vertical direction of 1100. Below the discharge port 1133e, the general winning port 1151 of the winning port unit 1150 is always open upward.

  When the game ball T is received in the general winning opening 1151, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 1180 and a detection signal is sent to the main control board 1113. The main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 based on a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the payout control board 1101 controls the prize ball device 740 to respond to the payout command received. A number (for example, 10) of game balls T are paid out to the dish unit 300.

  The game ball T that has flowed down the right side of the center bonus 1130 and has not been received in the general winning opening 1151 passes through either the left or right of the receiving portion 1161b in the front flow path forming member 1161 forming the general winning opening 1151. It flows down to the upper surface of the door part 1221a of the accessory prize winning opening / closing member 1221 that closes the prize winning prize opening 1155 of the article unit 1220. Then, the game ball T that has flowed down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a rolls to the left on the upper surface of the door portion 1221a below the top winning wall portion 1161f of the prize winning opening, and from the left end of the door portion 1221a It rolls to the upper surface of the left shelf 1161g and is discharged from the left end of the prize winning opening left shelf 1161g to the lower left.

  Then, the game ball T released from the prize winning port left shelf 1161g flows down to the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, rolls left on the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, and It is discharged from the left end of the two start opening upper shelf portions 1161j to the lower left. The game ball T released from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j abuts on the second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m on the left side, and moves downward along the right side of the second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m. Flow down. The game ball T that has flowed down along the right side of the second starting port area left standing wall portion 1161m flows down onto the second starting port area lower shelf portion 1161i, and the upper surface of the second starting port region lower shelf portion 1161i is moved to the left. Is then discharged from the left end of the second start opening area lower shelf 1161i to the lower left so as to pass through the front face of the big prize opening 1154.

  When the game ball T flows down on the right side of the center accessory 1130, the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134 disposed in the gate space 1133 c below the entry path 1133 b in the right flow path 1133 of the center accessory 1130. When it passes, it is detected by a gate sensor 1135 provided on the gate member 1134. When the passage of the game ball T is detected by the gate sensor 1135, the main control board 1113 acquires a normal random number as a normal lottery result, compares the acquired normal random number with the normal symbol table, and hits the acquired normal random number. It is determined whether or not. At this time, after the normal symbol is variably displayed on the function indicator 1114, the result of the normal lottery is displayed. Thereafter, when the normal lottery is won (“normal win”), the start port solenoid 1215 of the variable start port unit 1210 is energized for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 10 seconds). Note that in the lottery of the normal lottery result, the probability that “normal hit” will be drawn is set to be higher than ½ (for example, 49/50 to 299/300).

  When the start port solenoid 1215 is energized, the start port door member 1214 moves forward, passes through the second start port opening 1160c and the door slit 1160d of the base plate 1160, and passes through the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, The third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e protrude forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160. In this state, when the game ball T is released to the left from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, the first guide of the starting port door member 1214 is brought into contact with the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m. It abuts on the portion 1214a, and the flow direction is directed rightward by the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a. Then, the game ball T rolls from the first guide portion 1214a through the second guide portion 1214b to the third guide portion 1214c, and the inclination of the third guide portion 1214c and the guide piece 11611l of the front flow path forming member 1161 As a result, the rolling direction is directed rearward and is received by the second start port 1153 opening rearward.

  When the game ball T is received by the second start port 1153 and detected by the second start port sensor 1191, the main control board 1113 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 1101 by the detection signal, and the payout control board. In 1101, the prize ball device 740 is controlled to cause the number of game balls T corresponding to the received payout command to be paid out to the dish unit 300.

  The area around the second start port 1153 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in more detail. As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, etc., the second starting port 1153 is open to the front in such a size that only one game ball T can be received. Immediately above the second start port 1153, the second start port upper shelf 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161 is disposed. The second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is about three times as long as the outer diameter of the game ball T and extends to the left and right so that the left end side is lowered. 1153 is disposed immediately above. That is, the left end portion side of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j extends to the left side of the second starting port 1153. Further, in the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, the difference in height between the right end portion side and the left end portion side is set to about 約 of the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  On the left outer side from the left end portion of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, a second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m extending vertically with a space slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T is disposed. The second starting port region left standing wall portion 1161m has an upper end located above the left end of the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance of about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball T, and a lower end thereof. The upper shelf portion 1161j extends vertically so as to be positioned above the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214 at a distance lower than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the upper left end of the upper shelf portion 1161j.

  The start opening door member 1214 has a space at which only one game ball T can circulate between the second start opening area left standing wall portion 1161m and the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j so that only one game ball T can flow. Arranged below the upper shelf 1161j. The length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the start door member 1214 to the right end of the third guide portion 1214c (standing wall portion 1214e) is about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  The second start port 1153 is always open forward in the game area 1100. In other words, the game ball T can be received regardless of the game state. However, since the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged on the upper side of the second starting port 1153, even if the game ball T flows down from the upper side, it is not received by the second starting port 1153. On the other hand, if the game ball T that has fallen to the second start port region lower shelf 1161i arranged below the second start port 1153 jumps up to the height of the second start port 1153, the second start port 1153 There is a possibility that it will be accepted, but in practice it is almost never accepted. That is, the second start port 1153 is arranged in an area where the game ball T is difficult to circulate in the game area 1100.

  As described above, the start opening door member 1214 of the variable start opening unit 1210 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 to the second start opening 1153 so that the game ball T can be received. Since this start door member 1214 moves forward and backward, it is difficult to determine whether the start door member 1214 is moving forward or backward when viewed from the player (front) side. Therefore, the start opening door member depends on whether or not it abuts on the start opening door member 1214 by actually flowing the game ball T between the second start opening upper shelf 1161j and the second start opening area left standing wall 1161m. 1214 must be recognized, and the player must make a right turn so that the game ball T circulates between the second starting port upper shelf 1161j and the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m. Accordingly, attention can be paid to the movement of the game ball T, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball T and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In the normal state (when the start port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the front end of the start port door member 1214 does not protrude forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, as shown in FIG. It has become. Therefore, in this state, even if the game ball T flows down between the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start port region left standing wall portion 1161m, it does not come into contact with the start port door member 1214, and the lower side Will flow down onto the second start-port area lower shelf 1161i disposed at the same position.

  Then, when the start port solenoid 1215 is energized according to the normal lottery result selected by passing the game ball T through the gate member 1134, the front end of the start port door member 1214 is more forward than the front surface of the base plate 1160. Will protrude.

  In a state where the front end of the start port door member 1214 protrudes forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 (a state where the second start port 1153 can be received), the second start port upper shelf 1161j and the second start port region left standing wall portion When the game ball T flows down between 1161m, it contacts the upper surface of the first guide portion 1214a. Since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined so that the left end side becomes higher, the game ball T is guided rightward by this inclination. By the way, since the start port door member 1214 is separated from the lower surface of the second start port upper shelf 1161j by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, the left on the second start port upper shelf 1161j is left. The game ball T that rolls in the direction toward the right and comes in contact with the second start port area left standing wall 1161m from the left end of the second start port upper shelf 1161j and then contacts the first guide 1212a and is guided to the right. The movement becomes a movement that makes a U-turn suddenly, and can attract the player's interest strongly (see FIGS. 122 (b) and 123 (b)).

  Then, the game ball T guided to the right by the first guide part 1214a rolls on the second guide part 1214b on the right side thereof. Since the second guide portion 1214b has a smaller inclination angle from the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, the increase in the rolling speed of the game ball T is delayed. The game ball T that has rolled the second guide portion 1214b to the right rolls to the third guide portion 1214c on the right side thereof. In the third guide portion 1214c, a bottom surface is lowered rearward, and a guide piece 11611l that protrudes leftward from the right side of the third guide portion 1214c toward the front is provided on the third guide portion 1214c. Therefore, the game ball T is guided rearward and is received by the second starting port 1153 that is open to the rear side.

  Since the front plate portion 1161a of the front flow path forming member 1161 is present on the front side of the front end of the start door member 1214 protruding forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, the game ball T moves forward. It will not fall out (see FIG. 113 etc.).

  When energization of the start port solenoid 1215 is completed, the plunger 1215a that has been immersed by the urging force of the coil spring provided in the start port solenoid 1215 protrudes, and the start port door member 1214 moves backward via the link member 1216. As the start port door member 1214 moves backward, the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b protruding from the front surface of the base plate 1160 gradually decreases, and the front end of the start port door member 1214 And the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a in the front flow path forming member 1161 gradually increase.

  When the start port door member 1214 is retracted, the game ball T flows down between the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second start port area left standing wall portion 1161m, or the first guide portion 1214a or When the game ball T rolls on the second guide portion 1214b, the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, etc. gradually decreases, so the game ball T rolling to the right side Before reaching the third guide portion 1214c, it does not fall downward from the gap between the front end of the start port member 1214 and the front plate portion 1161a and is received by the second start port 1153 (FIG. 123 ( see c)).

  As a result, when energization of the start port solenoid 1215 is completed, it is possible to immediately disable the game ball T from being received into the second start port 1153, thereby reducing the extra game ball T from being received. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. On the other hand, since the game ball T falls from the middle of the start port door member 1214, the player is expected to have an opportunity to accept the second start port 1153 next time. It becomes possible, and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

[3-2. Game state]
Next, the gaming state in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is controlled mainly in one of the “normal game state”, “time-short game state”, and “hit game state”.

  In the “normal game state”, when the game ball T launched to the left area of the game area 1100 by the player making a left strike is received in the first start port 1152, the first special symbol determination (the special lottery described above) is performed. ) Is performed, and the game in which the game in which the determination symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination after the special symbol is variably displayed on the function display 1114 is stopped and displayed is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the lottery value determined to be one type big hit in the first special symbol determination is defined as “1”, and the lottery value determined as lost is defined as “199”. One kind of big hit with a probability of 1/200. When it is determined that the first special symbol determination is a one-type big hit, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, and a big hit game described later is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be one type big hit in the first special symbol determination, it becomes “one type big hit without a sudden short-time ball” with a probability of 10%, and “one type with a ball with a short time” with a probability of 40%. “Big hit”, with a probability of 50%, “1 type big hit with short-running balls”.

  Here, the “1 type big hit without sudden short play” is a type 1 big win in which the gaming state is set to the short running state after a predetermined number of round games that open the big prize opening 1154 for a short period of time. “Type 1 big hit with timed out ball” is a type 1 big hit in which the gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state after the big winning game in which the round game that opens the big winning opening 1154 for a long period of time is executed. “One-type big hit with short running out ball” is a one-type big hit in which the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state after the big winning game in which a round game that opens the big winning opening 1154 for a long period of time is executed.

  In the “short-time gaming state”, when the game ball T launched to the right area of the gaming area 1100 by the player making a right strike passes through the gate member 1134, the normal symbol determination (the above-described normal lottery) is performed. The normal symbol determination is performed in the “short-time gaming state”, and when the above-described normal hit is reached, the second start port 1153 is opened and the game ball T can be received.

  When the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153 while the gaming state is controlled to the “short-time gaming state”, the second special symbol determination is performed, and the special symbol is variably displayed on the function display 1114. A game in which a determination symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed later is executed.

  If the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit” (1 type big hit), it becomes “1 type big hit with short-running ball with a short time” with a probability of 70%, and “with short time without ball 1” with a probability of 30%. Species hit ".

  Here, “type 1 big hit with short-running ball with time” means that the game state is set to the short-time game state after a big-hit game in which a round game that opens the big prize opening 1154 for a long period of time is executed. It is a seed hit. “Type 1 big hit with short running out” is a type 1 big hit in which the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state after the big winning game in which the round game that opens the big winning opening 1154 for a long period of time is executed. . As described above, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, after the big hit game is performed without performing the small hit game, the gaming state is set to the short-time gaming state or the normal gaming state. .

  In the “short-time gaming state”, when it is determined that a small hit is made by the second special symbol determination, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, and the accessory winning prize opening 1155 is temporarily opened. Then, when the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a from the prize winning port 1155 during the small hit game, the game ball T is received in the V winning port 1156 and becomes a two-type big hit, which will be described later after the small hit game. A jackpot game is executed.

  Specifically, when the small hit is reached, the winning combination prize opening / closing member 1221 slides, whereby the gaming ball T can be received from the winning combination prize opening 1155 to the receiving portion 1236a. Then, the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1246a is received in the V prize opening 1156 as the rotating body 1236 rotates from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b). Two types of big hits.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the lottery value determined to be one type big hit in the second special symbol determination is defined as “1”, and the lottery value determined as small hit is defined as “198”. The lottery value determined to be lost is set to “1”. As described above, most of the determination results of the second special symbol determination executed on condition that the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153 are small hits, so it is likely to be a two-type big hit.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 during the small hit game, it becomes “two-type big hit with a ball with time reduction” with a probability of 70%, and “time reduction with a probability of 30%. “Without balls and 2 kinds of big hits” (see FIG. 126). Here, the “type 2 big hit with ball with time saving” is a type 2 big hit in which the gaming state is set to the time saving gaming state after the big winning game is executed. On the other hand, “type 2 big hit with no short running” is a type 2 big hit in which the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state after the big winning game is executed.

  The “hit game state” is a game state that is executed when the big win symbol indicating that a big hit is displayed on the function indicator 1114, that is, when it is determined to be the above-mentioned type 1 big hit, A game for opening the mouth 1154 is executed.

  Further, during the above-described small hit game, the V winning opening 1156 is temporarily opened, and the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 during this time, thereby generating two types of big hits. Also in this case, a game in which the big prize opening 1154 is opened as a big hit game is executed.

  As described above, when a big hit game is performed by receiving the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game, the game state is changed to the short-time game state or the normal game at the end of the big hit game depending on the type of the small hit. Set to state.

  In the “short-time gaming state”, if a big hit does not occur even after the second special symbol determination is performed 100 times, the gaming state is returned from the “short-time gaming state” to the “normal gaming state”. Become. It should be noted that the gaming state may be returned to the “normal gaming state” when a big hit does not occur even after the first special symbol determination is performed 100 times. In addition, even when the total number of times of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is performed 100 times, the game may be returned to the “normal gaming state” when no big hit occurs.

[4. Processing by main control board]
Next, processing performed by the main control board 1113 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 141. The processing by the main control board 1113 proceeds along the processing procedure on the control program executed during the game.

[4-1. Timer interrupt processing by main control board]
First, with reference to FIG. 127, timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 1113 will be described in detail. The main control board 1113 repeatedly executes timer interrupt processing at regular intervals during normal operation except when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  First, the main control board 1113 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). .

  Here, the big hit random number is a random number for determining the big hit, the small hit or the loss. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (see FIG. 126) when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The small hit design random number is a random number for determining the type of two big hits (see FIG. 126) generated when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game.

  In addition, the reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an effect with reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not the second start port 1153 is opened.

  Next, the main control board 1113 performs a detection process when the detection signal from each sensor is input (step S2). This detection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes special symbol determination, and performs special symbol processing including processing for causing the function indicator 1114 to variably display the special symbol and then stopping and displaying the determination symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination. Execute (Step S3). This special symbol process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes normal symbol processing including normal symbol processing including processing for displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination after the normal symbol is variably displayed on the function display 1114. Execute (step S4). This normal symbol processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the main control board 1113 determines that the second start port 1153 is to be opened as a result of the normal symbol determination, the main control board 1113 slides the start port door member 1214 and receives the game ball T in the second start port 1153. The start door process which makes possible is performed (step S5). This start door process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the main control board 1113 determines that it is a small hit in the special symbol processing of step S3, the accessory winning opening 1155 is temporarily opened by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221. When the game ball T is received from the winning prize winning opening 1155 to the receiving portion 1236a, an opening rotation control process for allowing the game ball T to be received in the V winning opening 1156 by rotating the rotating body 1236 is executed (step). S6). This opening rotation control means will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, when it is determined that the main control board 1113 is a big hit in step S3, or when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game, the big winning opening 1154 is opened. A mouth opening control process is executed (step S7). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes prize ball processing for controlling payout of prize balls according to winning of the game balls T (step S8).

  Then, the main control board 1113 has peripheral information necessary for determining various commands and effects stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM of the main control board 1113, not shown) in the processing steps before step S8. A transmission process to be transmitted to the control board 1116 is executed (step S9).

[4-2. Detection process by main control board]
Next, the detection process in step S2 of FIG. 127 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 1190, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit design random number, reach random number, which are appropriately updated by the process of step S1, The first start port detection process for acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 1190 is input is executed (step S21). The first start port detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start port sensor 1191, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small hit number, which are appropriately updated by the process of step S1. For the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number), a second start port detection process is performed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the second start port sensor 1191 is input (step S22). The second start port detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the main control board 1113 monitors the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the gate sensor 1135, and when the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is input for the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The gate detection process for acquiring the value of is executed (step S23). This gate detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[4-3. First start port detection process by main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the first start port detection process in step S21 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail. First, the main control board 1113 receives a detection signal from the first start port sensor 1190 (a signal indicating that the game ball T has been received in the first start port 1152) following the random number update process in step S1. Based on whether or not the first start port sensor 1190 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S211).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the first start port sensor 1190 has detected acceptance of the game ball T (step S211: YES), the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 It is determined whether or not the reserved number is less than the maximum reserved number 4 of the first special symbol determination stored in advance in a storage area (ROM of the main control board 1113, not shown) (step S212).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the hold number is less than the maximum hold number 4 (step S212: YES), the main control board 1113 adds “1” to the value of the hold number (step S213).

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the first start port sensor 1190 has not detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S211: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the hold number is the maximum hold number 4 (Step S212: NO), the first start port detection process is terminated.

  Next, the main control board 1113 acquires a big hit random number as acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination (step S214), acquires a big hit symbol random number (step S215), acquires a reach random number (step S216), A fluctuation pattern random number is acquired (step S217), and the acquired random number is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113.

  The main control board 1113 sets a hold command for notifying that the first special symbol determination is put on hold in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S218). This hold command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. When the main control board 113 sets the hold command, the first start port detection process is terminated.

[4-4. Second start-up port detection process by main control board]
Next, the second start-up port detection process in step S22 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 performs the second start based on whether a detection signal from the second start port sensor 1191 (a signal indicating that the game ball T has been received in the second start port 1153) is input. It is determined whether or not the mouth sensor 1191 has detected acceptance of the game ball T (step S221).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the second start port sensor 1191 has detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S221: YES), the big hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is “ Based on whether or not it is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not a big hit game in which the big winning opening 1154 is opened (step S222). The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the jackpot game, and is set to “OFF” at the end of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not in the big hit game (step S222: NO), whether or not the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON”. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the small hit game for opening the winning prize winning opening 1155 is in progress (step S223). This small hit game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the small hit game that opens the accessory prize winning opening 1155 is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the small hit game, and the small hit game ends. Sometimes set to "OFF".

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is not being played (step S223: NO), the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed (step S224). If it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not in progress (step S224: NO), the big hit random number is acquired (step S225), the big hit symbol random number is acquired (step S226), and the small hit symbol is acquired. A random number is acquired (step S227), a reach random number is acquired (step S228), and a variation pattern random number is acquired (step S229). When the main control board 113 acquires these random numbers, it ends the second start port detection process.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of step S227, an opening / closing pattern for opening / closing the winning combination winning opening 1155 is determined by sliding the winning combination winning opening / closing member 1221 based on the small winning design random number. The determined opening / closing pattern is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 together with the small hitting design random number, and further transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 in the transmission process of step S9.

  If it is determined that the second start port sensor 1191 has not detected acceptance of the game ball T (step S221: NO), if it is determined that a big hit game is being played (step S222: YES), a small hit game is being played. If it is determined (step S223: YES), and if it is determined that the special symbol is changing (step S224: YES), the second start port detection process is terminated.

[4-5. Gate detection processing by main control board]
Next, the gate detection process in step S23 of FIG. 128 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1118 causes the gate sensor 1135 to pass the game ball T based on whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 (a signal indicating that the game ball T has passed to the gate member 1134) has been input. Is detected (step S231).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the gate sensor 1135 has detected the passage of the game ball T (step S231: YES), the number of normal symbol determinations stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is It is determined whether or not the maximum number of holds is less than 4 (step S232).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the number of reservations is less than the maximum number of reservations 4 (step S232: YES), it adds “1” to the value of the number of reservations (step S233). Then, the normal symbol random number used for the held normal symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S234). When the main control board 113 obtains the normal symbol random number, the gate detection process is terminated.

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the gate sensor 1135 has not detected the passage of the game ball T (step S231: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the hold number is the maximum hold number 4. (Step S232: NO), the gate detection process is terminated.

[4-6. Special symbol processing by main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol process executed by the main control board 1113 will be described in detail. First, the main control board 1113 is in the big hit game or the small hit game based on whether the big hit game flag or the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON”. It is determined whether or not (step S301).

  When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is in the big hit game or the small hit game (step S301: YES), it is determined that the special symbol processing is finished, but the big hit game or the small hit game is not in progress. If so (step S301: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being changed (step S302).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S313, while if it determines that the special symbol is not being displayed ( Step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not various random numbers of the second start opening winning according to the game ball T received in the second start opening 1153 is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (Step S303). ).

  Specifically, various random numbers acquired when the game ball T is received at the second start opening 1153 are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113, and various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored. Since a flag indicating that it has been stored is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113, it is stored based on whether or not this flag is stored when various random numbers are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. It is determined whether the various random numbers are related to the second start opening winning or whether the first starting opening 1152 is related to the first starting opening winning relating to the game ball T being received.

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S303: YES), the process proceeds to step S307, while When it is determined that the random number related to the start opening prize is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S303: NO), the number of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 Is determined to be equal to or greater than “1” (step S304).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of reservations is not “1” or more (step S304: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the special symbol process, while determining that the number of reservations is “1” or more. (Step S304: YES), the number of suspension is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (Step S305).

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes a RAM shift process of the main control board 1113 (step S306). Specifically, the jackpot random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number related to the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 are first stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. The oldest one is shifted to a specific storage area of the main control board 1113 RAM.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes a big hit determination process based on the random numbers stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S307). Specifically, by executing this big hit determination process, it is determined whether the big hit, the small hit, or the loss, and determination symbol information indicating the determination result is set. When it is determined that it is a big hit (1 type big hit), the type of the big hit is determined, and when it is determined that it is a small hit, the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game. The kind of two types of big hits that are generated when this happens is determined. This jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 executes a variation pattern setting process (step S308). Specifically, referring to a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113, the determination result of the jackpot determination in step S307, the type of the determined determination symbol, the current gaming state The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the first special symbol determination hold number, the reach random number and the variation pattern random number stored together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S307. By the processing in step S308, it is determined whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach. This variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 1113 relates to the symbol setting information set in step S307, whether the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or relates to the second special symbol determination. Information indicating whether or not, variation pattern setting information set in the process of step S308, information indicating whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach, information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1, etc. Is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S309). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission processing in step S9.

  The peripheral control board 1116 identifies the special symbol determination result by analyzing the variation start command received from the main control board 1113, and determines whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. The variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed is acquired, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is specified. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 1115, it is determined in what pattern the symbol is displayed (decorative symbol is displayed) and the effect of the determined content is executed.

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S309 (step S310). This special symbol variation display is performed on the function indicator 1114 in a predetermined manner.

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts measuring a variation time that is an elapsed time from the start of the variation display in step S310 (step S313).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the process of step S308 has elapsed since the measurement of the variation time in step S311 was started (step S313). . When the main control board 1113 determines that the variation time has not elapsed (step S313: NO), the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S313: YES), the symbol confirmation command for notifying the function display 1114 to display the determination result of the special symbol determination. Is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S314). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the symbol (decoration symbol) which was variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination will be performed.

  Next, the main control board 1113 ends the special symbol variation display started in step S310 (step S315). At that time, the determination symbol (big hit symbol, small bonus symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S307 is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner on the function display 1114 that has been variably displayed.

  Then, the main control board 1113 resets the fluctuation time started in the process of step S311 (step S316), starts a big hit game when it is a big hit, and starts a small hit game when it is a small hit. Game processing including processing and the like is executed (step S317). The main control board 113 ends the special symbol process when the game process ends. This game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[4-7. Big hit judgment process by main control board]
Next, the jackpot determination process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first performs a big hit determination (step S3071). Specifically, when executing the jackpot determination relating to the second start opening winning, the jackpot determination table (not shown) for the second starting opening winning is referred to and the jackpot determination relating to the first starting opening winning is executed. In this case, the first start opening winning jackpot determination table (not shown) is referred to.

  The main control board 1113 determines whether or not it is a one-type big hit based on the determination result of step S3071 (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that it is one kind of big hit (step S3072: YES), the type of big hit is referred with reference to the symbol determination table (not shown) at the time of big hit stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. Is determined (step S3073), and a jackpot symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S3073 is set (step S3074). As a result, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, and the big hit game is executed. When this process ends, the jackpot determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the result of the special symbol determination is not the one-type big hit (step S3072: NO), the flag related to the second special symbol determination is stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113. Whether or not this special symbol determination is the first special symbol determination related to the first start opening winning is determined (step S3075).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the determination is the first special symbol determination (step S3075: YES), the determination result is a loss, so that the loss symbol is set as setting information (step S3076). As a result, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like. The main control board 1113 ends the jackpot determination process when the lost symbol is set.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that it is not the first special symbol determination (step S3075: NO), it determines whether the result of the big hit determination is a small hit (step S3077). Specifically, whether or not the big hit random number stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the random number value corresponding to the small hit specified in the second start opening winning jackpot determination table (not shown). Based on the above, it is determined whether the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit or a loss.

  When determining that the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit (step S3077: NO), the main control board 1113 moves the process to step S3076. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S3077: YES), the main control board 1113 has a small hit symbol stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. The type of the small hit is determined with reference to a determination table (not shown) (step S3078). Specifically, based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit matches the random number for small hit stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113, the type of the small hit To decide.

  Next, the main control board 1113 sets the setting information of the determined small hit symbol (step S3079). As a result, the set small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like.

[4-8. Fluctuation pattern setting process by main control board]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the determination result of the special symbol determination is a one-type big hit (step S3081). When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is one kind of big hit (step S3081: YES), the big hit variation pattern table is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3082). When the main control board 1113 sets the variation pattern table for big hit, the process proceeds to step S3088.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not one type of big hit (step S3081: NO), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (step S3083). If it is determined that the main control board 1113 is a small hit (step S3083: YES), the small hit variation pattern table is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3084). When the main control board 1113 sets the variation pattern table for small hits, the process proceeds to step S3088.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not a small hit (step S3083: NO), that is, if it is a loss, it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect to make the player expect a big hit. Determination is made (step S3085). Specifically, whether or not the reach effect is performed based on whether or not the reach random number stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the reach random number stored in the ROM of the main control board 1113 in advance. Determine whether.

  When it is determined that the main control board 1113 performs the reach effect (step S3085: YES), the reach variation pattern table is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3086), and the reach effect is obtained. If it is determined not to be performed (step S3085: NO), the variation pattern table for loss is read from the ROM of the main control board 1113 and set in the RAM (step S3087). When the main control board 1113 sets the reach variation pattern or the loss variation pattern, the main control substrate 1113 proceeds to the process of step S3088.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines a variation pattern random number using the variation pattern table set in the processing of step S3082, step S3084, step S3086, or step S3087 (step S3088). Specifically, a variation pattern corresponding to a stored variation pattern random number is selected with reference to a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in advance in the RAM of the main control board 1113. With this process, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined.

  When the main control board 1113 selects the fluctuation pattern, the main control board 1113 sets the selected fluctuation pattern as setting information in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S3089). This variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command set in the process of step S309 together with the symbol set by the big hit determination process, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. The main control board 1113 ends the variation pattern setting process when the variation pattern is set.

[4-9. Game processing by main control board]
Next, the game process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not it is a one-type big hit (step S3171). Here, when it is determined that it is a type 1 big hit (step S3171: YES), the big hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S3172).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the hourly game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S3173). The short-time game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the short-time game state, and is set to “ON” when the normal game state shifts to the short-time game state. It is set to “OFF” when returning to the normal gaming state.

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3173: NO), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S3183, while the short-time game flag is set to “ON”. If it is determined that the game is in progress (step S3173: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3174). When the time control game flag is set to “OFF”, the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S318.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not a one-type big hit (step S3171: NO), whether or not the short game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON”. Is determined (step S3176). If the main control board 1113 determines that the time-saving game flag is set to “ON” (step S3176: YES), the main control board 1113 sets the time-saving game remaining count stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 to “1”. The value is updated to the subtracted value (step S3177). The short game remaining number indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the short time gaming state. When the short game remaining number becomes “0”, the gaming state is The short-time gaming state is returned to the normal gaming state.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the short time remaining game count stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is “0” (step S3178). If the main control board 1113 determines that the number of remaining time-saving games is “0” (step S3178: YES), the main control board 1113 sets the time-saving gaming flag to “OFF” (step S3179). As a result, the gaming state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the short-time game flag is not “ON” (step S3176: NO), or when it is determined that the short-time game remaining number is not “0” (step S3178: NO). ), The process proceeds to step S3108.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not it is a small hit (step S3180). When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not a small hit (step S3108: NO), the game process is ended, whereas when it is determined that the main control board 1113 is a small hit (step S3180: YES), the small hit is made. The game flag is set to “ON” (step S3181).

  Then, the main control board 1113 sets a start command in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S3183). Here, the start command is a period from the start of the big hit game until the first big winning opening 1154 starts to be opened, or from the start of the small hit game to the first time that the accessory winning prize opening 1155 starts to be opened. This command is used to notify the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process in step S9. The main control board 1113 ends the game process when the opening command is set.

[4-10. Normal symbol processing by main control board]
Next, the normal symbol processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S401). This auxiliary game flag is a flag indicating whether or not an auxiliary game is being performed in which the operation of allowing the game ball T to be received into the second start port 1153 by sliding the start port member 1214 is performed a predetermined number of times. “ON” is set during the game, and “OFF” is set when the auxiliary game is not being played. When determining that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S401: YES), the main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol processing.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S401: NO), the main display board 1113 determines whether or not the function indicator 1114 is displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol. If it is determined (step S402) that it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed (step S402: NO), the number of normal symbol determinations stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is "1" or more. It is determined whether or not there is (step S403).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of holds is not “1” or more (step S403: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol processing, but determines that the number of holds is “1” or more. (Step S403: YES), the pending number is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S404), and a hit random number determination process is executed (step S405). Specifically, the oldest normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is one of the winning values related to the normal symbol determination stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on whether or not they match.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S406), and if it is determined to be a win (step S406: YES), the function indicator 1114 The winning symbol to be stopped and displayed is set as the determination symbol (step S407). On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not successful (step S406: NO), the main control board 1113 sets a lost symbol (step S408).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is a normal gaming state (step S409). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol variation time for variably displaying the normal symbol on the function display 1114 is set to 25 seconds (step S410). .

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S409: NO), the main control board 1113 sets the normal symbol variation time to 2 seconds (step S411). The normal symbol variation time set in this way is temporarily stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113.

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts normal symbol variation display by the function indicator 1114 (step S412), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the variation display start (step S413). The main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol processing when the elapsed time measurement is started.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the normal symbol on the function indicator 1114 is in a variable display (step S402: YES), the main control board 1113 determines whether to end the normal symbol variable display (step S402). S415). Specifically, whether or not to end the normal symbol variation display based on whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement was started by the process of step S413 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in step S410 or step S411. Determine whether.

  When the main control board 1113 determines not to end the normal symbol fluctuation display (step S415: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol processing, while determining that the normal symbol fluctuation display is to be ended. (Step S415: YES), the normal symbol variation display on the function indicator 1114 is terminated, and the winning symbol set in the process of Step S407 or the lost symbol set in the process of Step S408 is stopped and displayed (Step S416). ).

  Next, the main control board 1113 resets the elapsed time when measurement was started in the process of step S413 (step S417). Then, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S418).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not winning (step S418: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol processing, but determines that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is correct. If it is (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S419). The main control board 1113 ends the normal symbol process when the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON”.

[4-11. Start door processing by main control board]
Next, the start door process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The main control board 1113 first determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S501). When determining that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S501: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the start door process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S501: YES), the main control board 1113 determines whether the start door member 1214 is in operation ( Step S502). If the main control board 1113 determines that the start port door member 1214 is operating (step S502: YES), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S507.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the start door member 1214 is not operating (step S502: NO), the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503). ). When determining that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503: YES), the main control board 1113 opens the second starting port 1153 for 0.1 second as the operation pattern of the starting port door member 1214. An operation pattern for performing the operation to be performed once is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S504).

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S503: NO), the main control board 1113 is in the short-time gaming state, so that the second start as the operation pattern of the start port door member 1214 An operation pattern for performing the operation of opening the mouth 1153 for 0.3 seconds five times is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S505).

  Next, after setting the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, the main control board 1113 causes the start port member 1214 to start the operation with the set operation pattern (step S506).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the started operation of the start door member 1214 has been completed (step S507). When the main control board 1113 determines that the started operation of the starter door member 1214 is not completed (NO in step S507), the main control board 1113 ends the starter door process.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the operation of the start door member 1214 has been completed (step S507: YES), the main control board 1113 sets the auxiliary game flag to “OFF” (step S508). The main control board 1113 ends the start door process when the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF”.

[4-12. Opening rotation control process by main control board]
Next, the opening rotation control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the small hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S601).

  When determining that the small hit flag is not set to “ON” (step S601: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the opening rotation control process. On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S601: YES), the elapsed time from the setting of the command in the process of step S3183 is determined in advance. It is determined whether or not the small hit game is being started based on whether or not the set time has been reached (step S602). If it is determined that the small hit game is being started (step S602: YES), the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the start time has elapsed (step S603). If it is determined that the start time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the opening rotation control process ends.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the start time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the number of winning of the game ball T to the winning combination prize opening 1155 stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 Is reset (step S604), and the opening control for opening the prize winning opening 1155 by sliding the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is started (step S605).

  To open the prize winning opening 1155, the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by sliding the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 based on the opening / closing pattern set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 in the process of step S227. .

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts measuring the time elapsed since the opening control was started (step S606). When the main control board 1113 starts measuring the elapsed time, the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S611.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is not starting (step S602: NO), the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the small hit game is ended (step S608). If the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is being ended (step S608: YES), the main control board 1113 moves the process to step S625.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the small hit game is not being ended (step S608: NO), the detection signal from the prize winning prize sensor 1224 (the game ball T is received at the prize winning prize 1155). Based on the presence / absence of input of a signal indicating that the game ball has been received, it is determined whether or not the winning combination prize opening sensor 1224 has detected the reception of the game ball T (step S609). If the main control board 1113 determines that the prize winning port sensor 1224 has not detected acceptance of the game ball T (step S609: NO), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the process of step S611.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the prize winning port sensor 1224 has detected acceptance of the game ball T (step S609: YES), it is determined that one game ball T has won the bonus prize winning port 1155, The winning number of the game balls T stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S610).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the elapsed time at which measurement is started in the process of step S606 matches a preset set time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (step S611). When it is determined that the main control board 1113 does not coincide with the set time (step S611: NO), the process proceeds to step S612, whereas when it is determined that it coincides with the set time (step S611: YES), The rotating body 1236 is rotated to start processing for allowing the game ball T to be received in the V prize opening 1156 (step S612).

  Specifically, the main control board 1113 performs a process of rotating the rotating body 1236 from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. The game ball T received in the portion 1236a can be received in the V prize opening 1156.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether the V winning opening sensor 1239 is based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 1239 (a signal indicating that the game ball T has been received in the V winning opening 1156). It is determined whether or not the acceptance of the game ball T has been detected (step S613).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the V winning opening sensor 1239 has not detected the acceptance of the game ball T (step S613: NO), the main control board 1113 proceeds to the processing of step S616, while the V winning opening sensor 1239 is When it is determined that the acceptance of the game ball T has been detected (step S613: YES), the V winning flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S614). This V winning flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the game ball T has won the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game and two types of big wins have occurred, and the gaming ball T has won the V winning opening 1156. When no game ball T wins the V winning opening 1156, it is set to "ON".

  Next, the main control board 1113 sets in the RAM of the main control board 1113 a V winning command for notifying that the game ball T has won the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game (step S615). This V winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 1156 (step S616). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed since the rotating body 1236 has been rotated.

  When it is determined that it is not the closing timing (step S616: NO), the main control board 1113 moves to step S620, while when it is determined that it is the closing timing (step S616: YES), the main control board 1113 is rotated. The body 1236 is rotated to close the V winning opening 1156 (step S317). Specifically, a process of closing the V winning opening 1156 is performed by performing a process of rotating the rotating body 1236 from the rightward position shown in FIG. 124B to the upward position shown in FIG. 124A.

  Next, the main control board 1113 opens the specified opening operation of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (for example, the prize winning opening 1155 for 3.2 seconds) based on the elapsed time when measurement is started by the process of step S606. It is determined whether or not (one operation) has been completed (step S620).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the specified opening operation has ended (step S620: YES), the main control board 1113 moves the process to step S622, whereas when it determines that the specified opening operation has not ended (step S620). S620: NO), the number of winning game balls T to the prize winning hole 1155 in this small hit game matches the number of game balls “6” prescribing the closing timing of the winning prize winning hole 1155 stored in advance. It is determined whether or not to perform (step S621).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the number of winnings does not match “6” (step S621: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the number of winnings matches “6” while ending the opening rotation control process. In such a case (step S621: YES), the opening control of the winning prize winning opening 1155 started in the process of step S605 is terminated (step S622), and the elapsed time when the measurement was started in the process of step S606 is reset (step S623). ), The measurement of the small hit end time is started (step S624). Here, the small hit end time refers to a period from the end of the opening of the prize winning opening 1155 to the end of the small hit game.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the small hit end time has passed based on whether or not the time when the measurement was started in step S624 has reached a preset small hit end time. (Step S625). When it is determined that the small hit end time has not elapsed (step S625: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the opening rotation control process, while a preset small hit end time has elapsed. (Step S625: YES), the small hit game flag is set to “OFF” in order to end the small hit game (step S626), and a small hit end command for notifying the end of the small hit game is issued. The RAM is set on the main control board 1113 (step S627). This small hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S628). When determining that the V winning flag is not set to “ON” (step S628: NO), the main control board 1113 determines that the game ball T has not won the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game. When it is determined that the V winning flag is set to “ON” while the opening rotation control process is finished (step S628: YES), the V winning flag is set to “OFF” (step S628). In S629), in order to start the big hit game following the small hit game, the big hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S630), and the short time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S631).

[4-13. Large prize opening opening control process by main control board]
Next, the special winning opening opening control process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the big hit game flag stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is set to “ON” (step S701). If the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S701: NO), it ends the big prize opening control process.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” (step S701: YES), the main control board 1113 sets the start command related to the jackpot game by the processing of step S3183. Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is being started (step S702).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit game is starting (step S702: YES), whether or not the start time has elapsed based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined start time. Is determined (step S703). When determining that the start time has not elapsed (step S703: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the special winning opening opening control process.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the start time has elapsed (step S703: YES), the main control board 1113 determines the number of rounds of the big hit game, the operation pattern of the big prize opening 1154, etc. It memorize | stores in RAM of the control board 1113 (step S704). By the processing in step S704, various times related to the big hit game such as an interval time between rounds and the next round, and an end time (ending time) after the last round are also set.

  Next, the main control board 1113 resets the winning number of the game balls T to the big winning opening 1154 stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S705), and the big hit round stored in the RAM The number is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S706). The number of rounds is set to “0” before the big hit starts, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S706 is performed.

  Next, the main control board 1113 starts opening control of the special winning opening 1154 (step S707), and starts measuring an opening time that is an elapsed time after the opening control is started (step S708). Then, a round start command for notifying that the round game is started is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S709). When the main control board 1113 sets the round start command, the process shifts to step S716.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit is not started (step S702: NO), it is determined at which point in the big hit game the current state stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 is. Based on the information shown, it is determined whether or not the big hit immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S711). If the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit is being ended (step S711: YES), it moves the process to step S725.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the big hit is not ended (step S711: NO), the main control board 1113 rounds based on the information indicating when the stored current state is in the big hit game. It is determined whether it is in progress (between the round and the next round) (step S712).

  When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is in the middle of a round (step S712: YES), the main winning board 1154 is closed at the end of the previous round, and then between the rounds set by the process of step S704. It is determined whether or not time has elapsed (step S713).

  If it is determined that the time between rounds has elapsed (step S713: YES), the main control board 1113 moves to step S705 because it is time to start the next round. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time between rounds has not elapsed (step S713: NO), the special winning opening release control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that it is not during the round (step S712: NO), it determines that it is in the round, and a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 1206 (game to the big prize opening 1154). Based on whether or not a signal indicating that the ball T has been received) is input, it is determined whether or not the game ball T has been received in the special winning opening 1154 (step S714).

  If the main control board 1113 determines that the game ball T is not received in the big prize opening 1154 (step S714: NO), the process shifts to step S716, while the game ball T is placed in the big prize opening 1154. If it is determined that acceptance has been detected (step S714: YES), the winning number of the game ball T is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S715).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 1154 (step S716). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S708 has reached a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) stored in advance.

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S716: YES), the main control board 1113 moves the process to step S718, but determines that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S718). S716: NO), the number of winning game balls T in the current round stored in the RAM of the main control board 11113 defines the closing timing of the big prize opening 1154 stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 1113. It is determined whether or not it matches the number of game balls “9” (step S717). Here, when it is determined that the number of winnings does not coincide with “9” (step S717: NO), the large winning opening opening control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 1113 determines that the number of winning matches with “9” (step S717: YES), the main control board 1113 ends the opening control of the special winning opening 1154 (step S718).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the current round number of the jackpot game stored in the RAM of the main control board 1113 matches the round number set by the process of step S704 (step S704). S719).

  When the main control board 1113 determines that the number of rounds does not match the set number of rounds (step S719: NO), the main winning opening 1154 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the time between rounds, which is the elapsed time from the start, is started (step S720). The time between rounds when the measurement is started by the process of step S720 is used for the process of step S713. When the main control board 1113 starts measuring the time between rounds, it ends the special winning opening opening control process.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the number of rounds matches the predetermined number of rounds (step S719: YES), it starts measuring the end time (step S722) and resets the stored number of rounds. (Step S723), a jackpot end command is set in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (Step S724). This jackpot end command is a command for notifying that the final opening of the big winning opening 1154 has ended, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission processing in step S9.

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed (step S725). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end time at which measurement is started by the process of step S722 has reached the jackpot end time set by the process of step S704. When determining that the big hit end time has not elapsed (step S725: NO), the main control board 1113 ends the big winning opening opening control process.

  On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (step S725: YES), the main control board 1113 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 after the jackpot game ends (step S725). S726). Then, in order to end the big hit game, the big hit game flag is set to “OFF” (step S727). The main control board 1113 ends the big prize release control processing when the big hit game flag is set to “OFF”.

[4-14. Game state setting process by main control board]
Next, the gaming state setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not the current big hit game is a big hit game subsequent to the small hit game (step S7261). Specifically, when the big hit game is performed following the small hit game, the big hit game flag is set to “ON” in the process of step S630, and when it is not the big hit game following the small hit game, the process of step S3172 Since the big hit game flag is set to “ON” in the process, it is determined whether or not the current big hit game follows the small hit game based on which process is set to “ON”. judge.

  When it is determined that the main control board 1113 is not the big hit game following the small hit game (step S7261: NO), the big hit symbol (RAM of the main control board 1113) stopped and displayed on the function display 1114 at the start of the big hit game Is determined based on the jackpot symbol setting information stored in (step S7262). If the main control board 1113 determines whether or not there is a short time after the end of the big hit game, the main control board 1113 moves the process to step S7264.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is a big hit game that follows the small hit game (step S7261: YES), the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the function display 1114 at the start of the small hit game (the stored small hit symbol) Based on the setting information), it is determined whether or not there is a short time after the end of the big hit game (step S7263).

  Next, the main control board 1113 determines whether or not there is a short time after the end of the big hit game (step S7264). If the main control board 1113 determines that there is no time saving (step S7264: NO), it moves the process to step S7267. On the other hand, if the main control board 1113 determines that there is a short time (step S7264: YES), it sets the short time game flag to “ON” (step S7265), and sets the short time game remaining count to “100” (step S7265). Step S7266). Thus, the game is controlled in the short-time game state when the second start port 1153 is easily opened until the special symbol determination is executed 100 times after the big hit game is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no time saving (step S7264: NO), the processing of step S7265 and step S7266 is not performed, and therefore the second start port 1153 is not easily opened after the big hit game is finished. The game is controlled in the normal game state.

  Then, the main control board 1113 sets a game state command for notifying the peripheral control board 1116 of the game state after the end of the current big hit game in the RAM of the main control board 1113 (step S7267). This gaming state command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1116 by the transmission process of step S9. When the main control board 1113 sets the game state command in the RAM of the main control board, the big prize opening opening control process ends.

[5. Characteristic effects of the first embodiment of the present invention]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 (game to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153). When the prize winning opening 1155 is accepted, according to the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the ball T), when the gaming ball T is accepted into the prize winning opening 1155, benefits such as payout of the gaming ball T are granted. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform a game ball T driving operation aiming at the prize winning opening 1155, and to prevent the game ball T from being entertained and to reduce the interest. can do. Since this prize winning port 1155 can accept game media according to the gaming state, the game ball T is limited to the prize winning port 1155. Granting of benefits due to acceptance of the game balls T can be reduced, and an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed. The game ball T received in the prize winning prize opening 1155 is sent to the upper port 1238b side opened in the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, and the rotating body reaches when the game ball T reaches the upper port 1238b. When the receiving portion 1236a of 1236 is positioned in the storage position facing upward, the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the upper port 1238b, and the rotating body 1236 rotates and receives in this state. When the part 1236a rotates to the release position facing rightward, the game ball T is received from the receiving part 1236a through the right part opening 1238c to the V winning opening 1156, which is different from the bonus winning opening 1155 (big hit game ) Will be given, and the player can be entertained by the given privilege, and at the V prize opening 1156 via the receiving part 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Since a privilege is granted when the game ball T is received, the player is excited about whether or not the game ball T received in the prize winning port 1155 is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for accepting the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  When the plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 is advanced or retracted, the rotating body 1236 is rotated by the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1232a. The driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 that rotates around the 1233a and meshes with the driving gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extending portion 1233b of the driving gear member 1233 rotates in the direction opposite to the driving gear member 1233. As the driven gear member 1234 rotates, the rotating body 1236 rotates between the storage position and the discharge position. As a result, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 is increased compared to the case where the rotating body 1236 is rotated by a motor as in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can play the game ball T on the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Even if it is going to take the timing of the game ball T so as to be accommodated, the timing can be made difficult. Accordingly, the game ball T can be made difficult to be accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, so that the game ball T can be made difficult to be received in the V award opening 1156, and the privilege due to the reception in the V award opening 1156 can be reduced. It is possible to suppress the increase of the burden on the game hall side by reducing the number of grants.

  Further, since the pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a is smaller than the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c, the rotation angle of the driven gear 1234a (rotating body 1236) is made larger than the rotation angle of the drive gear 1233c. Compared with the case where the drive gear 1233c and the driven gear 1234a have the same pitch diameter, the rotational speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased. Therefore, since the rotational speed of the rotating body 1236 increases, even if the player tries to drive the game ball T so that the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the timing is taken. Can be difficult.

  In addition, since the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is provided on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b, a lose hole 1230c for discharging the game ball T circulated from the accessory prize winning opening 1155 to the rotating body 1236 when not in the storage position is provided. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from staying between the rotating body 1236 and the accessory winning award 1155. Accordingly, even if the game ball T is intruded into the prize winning award 1155 by some illegal act, the game ball T is illegally accommodated in the reception unit 1236a as long as the reception unit 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is not in the accommodation position. It is possible to prevent the privilege from being granted illegally and to reduce the burden on the game hall due to the illegal act. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the normal state in which the prize winning opening 1155 cannot be received, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 rotates to the V winning opening 1156 side that coincides with the right portion opening 1238c. Therefore, even if an illegal game ball T is allowed to enter the prize winning opening 1155, it can be recognized at a glance that the game ball T cannot be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It is possible to prevent cheating by deceiving the act.

  Further, as described above, since the rotating body 1236 rotates faster than before, even if the game ball T is illegally received in the V winning opening 1156 (receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236), the rotating body 1236 rotates faster. By showing the moving rotating body 1236, it is possible to make it seem that it is difficult to make the receiving part 1236a of the rotating body 1236 receive the illegal game ball T at first glance, and to stop the fraud The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against the above can be obtained. Moreover, since fraud can be prevented, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 is covered with the peripheral wall portion 1238a, when the receiving portion 1236a opened to the outer peripheral side is rotated from the receiving position to the discharging position, the game ball T stored in the receiving portion 1236a. Even if centrifugal force due to rotation acts on the outer peripheral side of the receiving portion 1236a between the accommodation position and the discharge position, the game ball T is removed from the receiving portion 1236a by the centrifugal force because the peripheral wall portion 1238a is closed. Jumping out can be prevented, and the game ball T can be reliably moved to the release position. Further, since the game ball T can be prevented from jumping out from the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating rotating body 1236 by the peripheral wall portion 1238a, the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 can be further increased, It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects by making it difficult to take the timing of the body 1236.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T to the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153 is changed according to the game state that is changed when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100. The prize winning opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning prize opening unit 1220A of the prize winning unit 1220 is movable so that the prize winning prize opening 1155 can accept the game ball T). In this state, when the game ball T is received at the prize winning hole 1155, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls T is given, so the game ball T aimed at the prize winning hole 1155 is given to the player. You can entertain and entertain. When the game ball T that is driven into the game area 1100 aiming at the prize winning port 1155 is received in the prize winning port 1155, a privilege is given, and the player is further enjoyed by the given privilege. Can do. The game ball T received in the prize winning port 1155 is guided to the upper port 1238b formed in the upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 through the upper guiding portion 1238e of the V winning port unit 1220B. The rotating body 1236 comes into contact with the upper opening 1238b. At this time, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the upper opening 1238b, the game ball T passing through the upper opening 1238b is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Then, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a rotates together with the receiving portion 1236a while being received by the receiving portion 1236a as the rotating body 1236 rotates, and when the receiving portion 1236a coincides with the right port 1238c, From the receiving part 1236a to the right guiding part 1238f through the right opening 1238c, guided to the right guiding part 1238f and received in the V prize opening 1156, and a privilege such as a big hit game is given, The player can be more entertained, and the interest can be suppressed from decreasing. Since this rotator 1236 has only one receiving portion 1236a, it is possible to prevent a loss that is not guided to the V winning opening 1156 as compared to a case where a rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions like a conventional pachinko machine. Since there is no receiving portion 1236a, the pachinko machine 1 is easy to aim at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 at first glance even for beginners and players who are unfamiliar with the driving operation of the game ball T. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played, and the game can be enjoyed on the pachinko machine 1, and the player's interest is prevented from lowering. can do.

  In addition, since only one receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T of the rotating body 1236 is provided, the rotating body 1236 has a larger number of receiving portions than the conventional case. The outer diameter can be reduced, and it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100. The degree of freedom in arranging the rotating body 1236 is increased, and the rotating body 1236 is placed in an effective place. Can be arranged. At this time, since the rotating body 1236 is rotated about the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the circular end surface of the rotating body 1236 faces the front (player side), and the outer diameter of the rotating body 1236 is reduced. Even if it is smaller than the conventional one, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 (the receiving portion 1236a) from being hard to see, and it is possible to entertain the game by the rotating body 1236 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is sized so that only the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 1236 is open and can receive only one game ball T, and the second discharge path 1230e is provided on the rear side of the upper port 1238b. The game ball T that has flowed down through the upper port 1238b is reliably received by the receiving unit 1236a in a state where the receiving unit 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is aligned with the upper port 1238b. Even if another game ball T abuts from above the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a, another game ball T abuts against another game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. Can be prevented from falling off the receiving portion 1236a due to the impact, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a can be reliably moved to the V prize opening 1156 side by the rotation of the rotating body 1236. It can be sent.

  In addition, since the rear side of the upper port 1238b is provided with a loss hole 1230c communicating with the upper guiding portion 1238e and the second discharge path 1230e, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is not aligned with the upper port 1238b. Even if the game ball T flows down from the prize winning port 1155 side and contacts the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 via the upper port 1238b, it can be discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear hole 1230c. . On the other hand, with the receiving portion 1236a of the rotator 1236 coinciding with the upper opening 1238b and another gaming ball T already received by the receiving portion 1236a, another gaming ball T flows down from the side of the prize winning opening 1155. Even if the game ball T received by the receiving part 1236a through the upper port 1238b is contacted from the upper side, another game ball T coming later is discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear hole 1230c. can do. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls T are received in the prize winning opening 1155, only one game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the remaining game balls T are discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls T from being received in the V prize opening 1156 in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Note that one of the plurality of game balls T received in the prize winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and received in the V winning opening 1156, and a privilege is given to the rotating body 1236. Even if there is a game ball T that is not received by the receiving portion 1236a and is discharged from the lose hole 1230c, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Can do.

  Further, since the game ball T that has not been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is discharged from the lose hole 1230c to the rear side of the rotating body 1236, the game that has not been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Compared with the case where the ball T is discharged through at least one of the left and right sides of the rotating body 1236, the size of the V prize opening unit 1220B provided with the rotating body 1236 can be reduced. Accordingly, since the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100 is increased, the rotating body 1236 can be disposed at an effective place in the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be easily seen from the player side. It is possible to entertain the game by the rotator 1236 and to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, the center of the upper opening 1238b is formed slightly behind the center of the rotating body 1236 that receives the game ball T of the receiving portion 1236a, and the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. Since another game ball T coming later comes into contact with the slightly rearward position, the upper lip is opened through the upper guide portion 1238e in a state where the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When another game ball T from 1238b comes into contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a from above, another game ball T that has come in contact from above is guided to the rear having the loss hole 1230c. Thus, another game ball T coming later can be reliably discharged downward from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

  Further, since another game ball T coming later comes into contact with a position slightly behind the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game received by the receiving portion 1236a. A force that is pushed forward on the opposite side to the losing hole 1230c acts on the sphere T, and it is difficult for the sphere T to drop off to the losing hole 1230c side, and the state received by the receiving portion 1236a can be maintained. Therefore, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can be prevented from dropping and the player from being disappointed due to the absence of the opportunity to be received in the V prize opening 1156, and The game ball T received in the receiving unit 1236a can be reliably received in the V prize opening 1156, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, the rotating body 1236 is provided with an inclined portion 1236b that is inclined obliquely on the front side (inside) of the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a so as to be inclined backward as it goes upward (away from the center of rotation). At the same time, by forming the center of the upper port 1238b slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236a that receives the game ball T, the game ball T flowing down through the upper port 1238b contacts the inclined portion 1236b. Therefore, when the game ball T flows down from the upper port 1238b in a state where the game ball T is not received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T contacts the inclined portion 1236, and the game ball T is inclined by the inclined portion 1236b. Can be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T first comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b and comes into contact with the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, so that the impact acting on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a is reduced. Since the rotating body 1236 can be made difficult to break, and the circulation speed of the game ball T can be made to abut against the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, the game can be played at the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The ball T can be made difficult to jump, and the game ball T can be reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a.

  Further, since the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, the circulation speed of the game ball T guided by the upper guiding portion 1238e can be attenuated. Accordingly, even if another game ball T that has circulated through the upper guiding portion 1238e comes into contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the circulation speed can be increased by circulating the upper guiding portion 1238e. Is attenuated, the impact due to contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is reduced, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a jumps up from the receiving portion 1236a. The game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a can be made difficult to drop out of the receiving portion 1236a.

  Further, since the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, and the circulation speed of the game ball T can be attenuated by the upper guiding portion 1238e, the gaming ball T received in the prize winning hole 1155 The impact acting on the rotating body 1236 can be reduced even if the rotating portion 1236 is brought into contact (contact) with the rotating body 1236 (including the receiving portion 1236a) through the upper portion 1238b through the portion 1238e. It can suppress that the rotary body 1236 becomes easy to be damaged by the impact by. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated and declining the interest in the game due to the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the rotating body 1236, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. Can do.

  In addition, in order to allow the game ball T to be received in the V prize opening 1156 via the rotator 1236, it is necessary to open the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 so that the prize winning opening 1155 can be received. Opportunities for accepting the ball T to the V prize opening 1156 (the accessory prize opening 1155) can be limited, and a premium feeling can be given to the V prize opening 1156 and the like. Accordingly, when the prize winning opening 1155 can be received according to the gaming state, an opportunity to allow the V winning prize opening 1156 to receive the game ball T is obtained, so that the prize winning prize opening 1155, the rotating body 1236, and the V winning prize opening 1156 are obtained. And the like, and the player can be expected to accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156, and the player can throw the game ball T at the prize winning hole 1155. The operation can be actively performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable start port unit 1210 extends left and right with the slider portion 1214g of the start port door member 1214 and guides the game ball T to the second start port 1153 disposed on the right end side. The heights of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c that are possible are different, and the slider portion 1214g of the start port door member 1214 is positioned on the left side of the second start port 1153. The start port solenoid 1215 is attached to the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward on the opposite side of the second start port 1153 on the upper side and the rear side of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b. The game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the link member 1216 below the start port solenoid 1215. The forward / backward movement of the movable plunger 1215a is supported by the lower case 1211 so as to be slidable back and forth according to the changing gaming state (in accordance with the normal lottery result lottered by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134). Since it is transmitted to the starting port door member 1214 and the starting port door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the front and rear and vertical dimensions of the mechanism (variable starting port unit 1210) for sliding the starting port door member 1214 Can be made smaller than the conventional one. Therefore, since the installation space for providing the variable start port unit 1210 having the start port door member 1214 that slides back and forth according to the gaming state can be reduced, the start port door that slides back and forth in the game area 1100. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the member 1214 can be increased, and the atmosphere in the game area 1100 can be greatly changed by arranging the start door member 1214 in a place where the conventional pachinko machine could not be arranged. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player who wants to select it as a pachinko machine to play with a strong interest of the player can be obtained.

  Further, as described above, the installation space for providing the variable start port unit 1210 can be reduced. Even if the variable start port unit 1210 having the start port door member 1214 is provided, the decorative body, the movable decorative body, In addition, since the other members can be provided in the pachinko machine 1 without any problem, the decoration effect and the production effect by the other members can be sufficiently exhibited. It is possible to enhance the appeal of the player by improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the second start port 1153 is disposed on the right end side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion that extend to the left and right of the start port member 1214. Since the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 by 1214c, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the first guide of the start port member 1214 is provided. When the game ball T flows down on the portion 1214a, the game ball T rolls rightward on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c and is received by the second start port 1153. As a result, the game ball T rolls toward the second start port 1153 on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. Second for the acceptance of the starting opening 1153 can cause enhanced expectation, interest and to entertain the player it can be prevented from being lowered relative to the person. At this time, when the start door member 1214 that slides back and forth slides forward, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c guide the game ball T to the second start port 1153. In addition, since the action of the start door member 1214 is opposite to that of a conventional pachinko machine variable receiving port (variable winning opening), it may have a strong impact on players who are used to the conventional pachinko machine. It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  In addition, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c of the start door member 1214 are slid forward and protruded into the game area 1100 according to the game state. When the game ball T flows down on the portion 1214a, the game ball T can be guided to the right end side. The movement of the moving game ball T can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T rolling on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, when the plunger 1215a of the start port solenoid 1215 is moved back and forth in accordance with the game state, the engaging portion 1216c of the link member 1216 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a is moved left and right as the plunger 1215a moves back and forth. The main body 1216a revolves around the axis extending up and down around the main body 1216a so as to move, and the main body 1216a also extends up and down through the first piece 1216b connecting the engaging portion 1216c and the main body 1216a. It will rotate around the axis. A connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending from the main body portion 1216a at a right angle to the first piece 1216b is fitted and connected to a connecting pin 1214h protruding from the slider portion 1214g of the starting port door member 1214. Therefore, when the main body 1216a rotates, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d revolves around the vertically extending axis, and the revolving of the connecting hole 1216e causes the connecting pin 1214h and the slider 1214g to pass through. Thus, the start port door member 1214 slides back and forth. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 which can transmit the advance and retreat of the plunger 1215a of the start opening solenoid 1215 and can reliably slide the start opening door member 1214 back and forth, and can achieve the above-described operation and effect, is realized. be able to.

  Further, the second piece 1216d of the link member 1216 has a length that extends to the slider portion 1214g below the start port solenoid 1215 in the start port door member 1214, and is shorter than the conventional one. The slide range before and after 1214 can be narrowed, and the front and back dimensions can be made smaller than before. In addition, since the link member 1216 is rotated about the axis extending vertically, the vertical dimension is smaller than the conventional case where the link member 1216 is rotated about the axis extending horizontally. can do. Therefore, the mechanism (variable start port unit 1210) for sliding the start port door member 1214 back and forth can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized. it can.

  Further, since the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 can be discharged downward from the lower case 1211 through the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 Compared to the case where the rear case 1211 is guided and released, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 are provided with a passage member for receiving the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 on the rear side. There is no need, and it is possible to easily secure a space behind the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members such as a decorative body, a movable decorative body, and an accessory on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, that is, on the rear side of the variable start port unit 1210. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the start port member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 is moved backward in the unacceptable position in the game area 1100, the second start port 1153 is placed in the game area 1100. Since the second starting port 1153 is not closed at all times, the player can be given an illusion that the game ball T can be received into the second starting port 1153, The person's interest can be strongly attracted to the second start port 1153. Therefore, since the second start port 1153 is always open, the player can be interested in the second start port 1153 regardless of the movement (sliding) of the start port door member 1214. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for the reception of the game ball T into the second start opening 1153, and can be made tired of getting tired, and the second start opening 1153 for the player regardless of the position of the start opening door member 1214. It is possible to cause the player to perform a driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the game, and to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest in the game from being lowered.

  In addition, since the start port door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the start port door member 1214 is positioned at any position of the acceptable position protruding forward and the unacceptable position retracted backward. Since it looks the same when viewed from the front, it is difficult for the player to determine the position of the start door member 1214. Accordingly, since the position of the start door member 1214 is difficult to understand, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that the start door member 1214 is a receivable position protruding forward, and the player aims at the start door member 1214. It is possible to entertain the game ball T by performing a driving operation.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to reduce the extra number of game balls T received, a special lottery result in which an advantageous game state is generated by the extra game balls T received in the second starting port 1153 is drawn in a lottery manner. It is possible to prevent the game from being played, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down above the second start port 1153, the second start port 1153 flows to the front surface. Since the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is disposed below the second starting port upper shelf 1161j of the road forming member 1161, the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is prevented from receiving the game ball T directly into the second starting port 1153. The second starting port upper shelf 1161j is discharged downward from the left end. At this time, the start door member 1214 extending to the left and right according to the gaming state changed by the game ball T being driven into the game area 100 (according to the passage of the game ball T at the gate member 1134) The game ball T released downward from the left end portion of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j in a state of sliding forward and protruding into the gaming area 1100 is a second starting port in a plan view of the starting port door member 1214. When it flows down to the left outer portion of the upper shelf portion 1161j, the game ball T rolls on the start opening door member 1214 toward the second start opening 1153 and is received by the second start opening 1153. Then, when the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153, a privilege such as payout of the game ball T or a lottery of the special lottery result is given, so that the player can be entertained by the given privilege. At the same time, the operation of driving the game ball T toward the start port door member 1214 can be enjoyed so that the game ball T is received in the second start port 1153.

  The start port door member 1214 extending to the left and right is slid in the front-rear direction different from the receivable direction facing the left direction of the game ball T in the second start port 1153, so that the start port is located in the game area 1100. When the game ball T flows down on the start port door member 1214 when the door member 1214 is slid from the protruded state to the not protruded state (immersed state), the game ball T is flat on the start port door member 1214. Since it takes a certain amount of time from the left outer side of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j to the second starting port 1153, the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214. If the start opening door member 1214 is retracted during this period, the game ball T falls from the start opening door member 1214 without being received by the second start opening 1153. . More specifically, while the game ball T is rolling to the right toward the second start port 1153, the upper surface of the start port member 1214 on which the game ball T is placed by the retraction of the start port door member 1214 is It gradually becomes smaller, and before the game ball T reaches the second start port 1153, it will fall off from the start port member 1214. Therefore, since it can reduce that the game ball T is received by the 2nd start port 1153 extra, privilege (especially, especially by accepting the game ball T to the extra 2nd start port 1153, It is possible to reduce giving a lottery of a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  If the game ball T flows down on the start port door member 1214 while the start port member 1214 slides forward so as to protrude into the game area 1100, the start port door member 1214 causes the game ball T to be There is a possibility that the second start port 1153 is guided and accepted. However, since the start door member 1214 slides according to the gaming state, it is difficult to know the timing at which the start door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100, and the start door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100. Since the player performs the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start opening door member 1214 after confirming that the start opening is made, the start opening door member 1214 slides so as to protrude into the game area 1100. The possibility that the game ball T will flow down onto the start door member 1214 is reduced, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed.

  Further, since the start opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the game ball T flows down on the start opening door member 1214, it acts on the start opening door member 1214 by the contact of the game balls T. A drive mechanism (starting-port solenoid 1215) that slides the starting-port door member 1214 only by the impact acting on the slide groove 1211d in the lower case 1211 of the variable starting-port unit 1210 that supports the start-port door member 1214 in a slidable manner. And the link member 1216) are hardly affected, and the start port door member 1214 and the like (variable start port unit 1210) can be made difficult to be damaged.

  Furthermore, since the start port door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the length (distance) at which the start port door member 1214 is slid is shorter than when the start port door member 1214 is slid left and right. can do. Accordingly, the time from when the start port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 until the start port door member 1214 is retracted and immersed can be shortened, so that the game ball T is guided to the second start port 1153 by the start port door member 1214. The start opening door member 1214 can be immersed before being played, and the second start opening 1153 can be made difficult to receive the game ball T. In addition, since the start port door member 214 is slid in the front-rear direction, a space for immersing the start port door member 1214 and a mechanism for sliding are disposed on the rear side of the game area 1100. The inside of the game area 1100 is not compressed by a mechanism for sliding the start door member 1214 (the start opening solenoid 1215, the link member 1216, etc.), and the inside of the game area 1100 can be used as widely as possible. Can do.

  Further, since the upper surface of the second guide portion 1214b adjacent to the second start port 1153 in the start port member 1214 is formed flat without protrusions, the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100. Even if the game ball T flows down on the starter door member 1214 when sliding back so as to be immersed from the state where it has been moved, the game ball T is attracted to the rear end side of the game area 1100 by the protrusion, and the starter door It is difficult for the game ball T to fall from the member 1214, and the game ball T does not jump up toward the second start port 1153 due to the protrusion, and the game ball T can be smoothly dropped from the start port door member 1214. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect.

  Further, the game ball T can be received from the left direction with respect to the second start port 1153, and the game ball T guided from the left side by the start port door member 1214 extending to the left and right enters the second start port 1153 as it is. Therefore, when the game ball T is guided to the start port member 1214, the player can easily recognize that the second start port 1153 is surely received. Therefore, when the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, it can be assumed that the game ball T is allowed to flow into the second start port 1153 if the game ball T flows down to the start door member 1214. Thus, it is possible to actively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  In addition, the start port door member 1214 is caused to slide back and forth by projecting or immersing the start port door member 1214 into and out of the game area 1100 by the advancement and retraction of the plunger 1215a that is movable by energizing the start port solenoid 1215. As compared with the case where the motor is slid by a motor, the sliding speed of the start port door member 1214 can be increased with a simple configuration. Accordingly, since the start port door member 1214 can be quickly slid, the start port door member 1214 is moved to the game area 1100 before the game ball T on the start port door member 1214 is guided to the second start port 1153. It is possible to retreat from the inside, and it is possible to reliably reduce the extra game ball T received into the second starting port 1153, and to suppress an increase in the load on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lottery is made by passing the game ball T through the gate member 1134 as a game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 110 by a player's operation. When the start port door member 1214 of the variable start port unit 1210 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the normal lottery result, the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 is When it flows down to the two start opening upper shelf portions 1161j, it rolls to the left by the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j, and when discharged from the left end side, it flows downward by the second start opening region left standing wall portion 1161m. The first start portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214 located below the second start port area left standing wall portion 1161m and the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j, Distributed in the U-turn shape by being guided to the right on the side opposite to the left along the member 1214, and thus received in the second start hole 1153. When the game ball T is received at the second start opening 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a bonus and the lottery of the special lottery result is performed, so that the player can be entertained with the bonus and the game ball is played. It is possible to entertain the game ball T to be driven (right-handed) aiming at the second starting port upper shelf 1161j so that T is received in the second starting port 1153. At this time, the start opening door member 1214 is bent obliquely toward the left end side away from the second start opening 1153 below the second start opening upper shelf 1161j and the second start opening region left standing wall 1161m. Since the first guide portion 1214a is provided, the player sees that the game ball T is guided toward the second start port 1153 when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a. It can be recognized, and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball T to the second start port 1153 can be enhanced. In addition, the first guide portion 1214a far from the second start port 1153 in the start port door member 1214 and the second guide portion 1214b close to the second start port 1153 have different angles of inclination. Since the acceleration of the game ball T is fast at 1214a and the acceleration of the game ball T is slow at the second guide portion 1214b, the rolling speed of the game ball T changes depending on the part where the game ball T rolls. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the rolling speed of the game ball T that has not changed on the start door member changes, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, and to make the player less tired. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball T, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. Further, as described above, since the rolling speed of the game ball T varies between the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b of the start port door member 1214, it rolls on the start port door member 1214. The player's interest can be attracted and attracted attention to the game ball T being played, and the start port member 1214 can be focused on the game ball T rolling on the start port member 1214. Thus, it is possible to increase the expectation for the reception of the game ball T to the second start port 1153 where the game ball T is guided.

  Further, the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and when the game ball T comes into contact with the first guide portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214 from above, it is illustrated. Even if the game ball T is reflected by the first guide portion 1214a, it moves along the first guide portion 1214a, so that the game ball T can be circulated along the start door member 1214 extending to the left and right. The game ball T can be moved on the start door member 1214, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 ° to 50 ° with respect to the horizontal, the game ball T hits the first guide portion 1214a of the start door member 1214 from above. In the case of contact, the player can recognize at a glance that the game ball T in contact with the first guide portion 1214a is reflected to the right where the second start port 1153 is located. Accordingly, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the player recognizes that the game ball T can be received into the second start port 1153 when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a. Can be made. Accordingly, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the player is actively engaged in driving the game ball T toward the first guide portion 1214a of the start port member 1214. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Furthermore, since the left and right lengths in plan view of the first guide portion 1214a are formed within the range of 0.2 to 1 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the game ball T is formed by the first guide portion 1214a. Can be surely guided to the second starting port 1153 side, and the rolling speed of the guided gaming ball T can be suppressed to be higher than necessary to make it easier to see the rolling gaming ball T. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game medium and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the left and right lengths in plan view of the starting port door member 1214 are formed within a range of 2 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214 is formed. Thus, the game ball T rolling on the start port door member 1214 toward the second start port 1153 can be shown appropriately to the player without excess and deficiency, and the game ball T with impact can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the movement of the game ball T and to reduce the interest of the player.

  When the game ball T is guided by the front flow path forming member 1161 provided in the game area 1100 when the start opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the start opening door Since the game ball T flows down to the left end side of the member 1214 away from the second start port 1153, that is, the first guide portion 1214a side, the game ball T is moved to the first guide portion 1214a of the start port door member 1214. Can flow down (abut). Accordingly, the game ball T can be rolled over substantially the entire length of the left and right sides of the start port door member 1214, and the movement of the game ball T by the start port door member 1214 provided with the first guide portion 1214a is given to the player. It can be surely shown, and it can suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, since the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged immediately above the start port door member 1214 so that the game ball T is distributed in a U-turn shape, the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j is disposed on the start port door member 1214. Compared with the case where the game ball T is distributed in a crank shape by being arranged at a position on the left outer side than the first guide portion 1214a with respect to the top of the first opening portion 1214a, The space in the left-right direction occupied by the two start opening upper shelf portions 1161j and the like can be reduced. Accordingly, since the degree of freedom of arrangement of the start door member 1214 and the like can be increased, the start door member 1214 and the like can be placed in the game area 1100 so that the player can easily see them. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be realized with certainty.

  Also, when the start door member 1214 is protruded into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the second start opening area standing wall 1161m extends vertically on the left outside of the first guide part 1214a. By the time the game ball T released from the second starting port upper shelf 1161j flows down onto the starting port door member 1214, it is brought into contact with the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m and left of the first guiding unit 1214a. It can be prevented from flowing down to the outside, and the game ball T can surely flow down onto the start port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), and the second start port upper shelf 1161j and the first When the game ball T flowing down between the two start port area left standing wall portions 1161m bounces against the start port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), the second start port region left standing wall portion 1161m plays a game. The ball T can be reliably prevented from flowing to the side opposite to the second starting port 1153 side, and the gaming port T can be reliably guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214. it can.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T that is driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down to the upper side of the second start port 1153 that opens forward, The second starting port upper shelf 1161j is in contact with the second starting port upper shelf 1161j immediately above the starting port 1153, and rolls in a direction away from the position immediately above the second starting port 1153 to the left according to the inclination of the upper surface. It is discharged from the left end side away from the second starting port 1153 in the starting port upper shelf 1161j and comes into contact with the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m. At this time, the game ball T thrown into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, whereby the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100. The game ball T released from the second starting port upper shelf 1161j and contacting the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m comes into contact with the starting port door member 1214 and is Guided to the front side of the second starting port 1153 and received in the second starting port 1153. At this time, the second starting port region right standing wall 1161k extending vertically is provided on the right outer side of the second starting port 1153 on the same side as the side on which the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is high. Even if the game ball T guided in the direction of the second start port 1153 by the start port door member 1214 tries to pass through the front side of the second start port 1153, the game ball T passes through the second start port region right standing wall 1161k. The game ball T guided by the start opening door member 1214 is received in the second start opening 1153. When the game ball T is received at the second start opening 1153, a bonus such as payout of the game ball T or a lottery result of the special lottery result is given, and the player can be entertained by the given bonus. Thus, the operation of driving the game ball T aiming at the second start port 1153 can be enjoyed so that the game ball T is received in the second start port 1153. Then, before the game ball T is received in the second start port 1153, the game ball T comes into contact with the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j, the second start port area left standing wall portion 1161m, and the start port door member 1214. Therefore, the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball T in which the circulation direction changes rapidly, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

  Further, when the starter door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, if the game ball T flows down onto the second starter upper shelf 1161j, the game ball T moves in a U-turn as described above. Therefore, when the distribution direction of the game ball T changes by 180 degrees, the distribution speed of the game ball T becomes relatively slow. Accordingly, since the movement of the game ball T distributed in a U-turn shape is easy to see, the movement of the game ball T can be easily enjoyed by the player, and the movement of the game ball T is enjoyed and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T circulates in a U-turn shape, and when the start door member 1214 does not protrude into the game area 1100, the game ball T Circulates in an inverted L-shape, so that the game ball T moves differently even if the game ball T flows down to the same second start port upper shelf 1161j according to the protrusion of the start port member 1214. be able to. Accordingly, since the movement (flow) of the game ball T changes according to the game state (according to the passage of the gate member 1134 by the game ball T), the game ball T with various movements is shown to the player. It can be entertained, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and the interest of the player from decreasing.

  Furthermore, the space | interval which can distribute | circulate only one game ball T between the 2nd starting port upper shelf part 1161j and the starting port door member 1214 arrange | positioned up and down is set as the 2nd starting port upper shelf part 1161j and the starting port. Since the vertical distance from the door member 1214 is reduced as much as possible, the game ball T that abuts against the second starting port left standing wall portion 1161m from the second starting port upper shelf 1161j and circulates on the starting port door member 1214. The movement of the player can be made to make a sudden U-turn, so that the player can be entertained by the movement of the game ball T, which has not existed in conventional pachinko machines, and the player's interest in the game It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, since the start port member 1214 extends to the left and right longer than the second start port upper shelf 1161j, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the second start port Since it is longer than the upper shelf portion 1161j, the start port door member 1214 is easily noticeable, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the projecting start port door member 1214. Therefore, when the starter door member 1214 protrudes, the player is made to pay attention to the starter door member 1214, whereby the second starter upper shelf 1161j near the starter door member 1214 and the second starter port area left standing wall 1161m. Therefore, the game balls T rolling on the second start opening upper shelf 1161j and the start opening door member 1214 can be surely seen and moved in a U-turn shape. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball T, and to drive the game ball T toward the second start-port upper shelf 1161j so that the game ball T is distributed on the start-port door member 1214 to the player. It can be operated, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, when the starter door member 1214 protrudes, if the game ball T is circulated on the starter door member 1214 via the second starter upper shelf 1161j and the second starter region left standing wall 1161m, Since it is guided to the start port 1153 and received by the second start port 1153, when the start port member 1214 protrudes according to the gaming state, the game ball T is moved to the start port member 1214 to the player. It is possible to positively perform the operation of driving the game ball T aiming at the second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j, and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, when the game ball T hitting the game area 1100 aiming at the second start port 1153 flows down onto the second start port upper shelf 1161j, the game ball T rolls leftward away from the second start port 1153. When the game ball T moves away from the second starting port 1153, the player can feel unhappy. When the game ball T is released from the second start port upper shelf 1161j, if the start port member 1214 protrudes, the game ball T separated from the second start port 1153 is moved by the start port door member 1214. Rolls in the right direction approaching the second start port 1153. That is, since the game ball T makes a U-turn and returns to the second start port 1153 side, the player can be pleased, and the expectation for accepting the game ball T to the second start port 1153 is enhanced. It can suppress that interest falls.

  Further, since the second starting port region right standing wall portion 1161k extending up and down to the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is provided on the right outside of the second starting port 1153, the second starting port upper shelf extending left and right. Even if an attempt is made to accept the game ball T from the right side where the upper surface of 1161j is raised to the second starting port 1153 arranged below the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, the right side of the second starting port 1153 The second starting port region right standing wall 1161k extending to the second starting port upper shelf 1161j can prevent the game ball T from being received into the second starting port 1153. Therefore, in order to allow the second starting port 1153 to receive the game ball T, the second starting port 1153 must flow down from the left side where the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is lowered. It is possible to prompt the player to drive the game ball T aiming at the upper shelf 1161j on the second start port so that the game ball T flows down to the side. When the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the gaming state, the game ball T is formed by the second start opening upper shelf 1161j, the second start opening area left standing wall 1161m, and the start opening door member 1214. Since the U-turn is guided in the direction of the second starting port 1153, the game ball T that circulates around can be enjoyed and the game ball T is expected to be received in the second starting port 1153. It is possible to increase the game performance, and to delight the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation, the game state is changed by the game ball T that is driven, and the game state is changed. Accordingly, the start port member 1214 that extends in the left-right direction longer than the outer diameter of the game ball T and guides the game ball T to the second start port 1153 slides forward and protrudes into the game area 1100. In this game area 1100, a second start port right standing wall 1161k protruding forward on the right side of the second start port 1153 is disposed, and the second start port 1153 is located above the second start port 1153. A second start port upper shelf portion 1161j extending shorter than the left and right lengths of the start port door member 1214 is arranged so that the left side is lowered from the upper end of the standing wall portion 1161k, and the start port door member 1214 is in the game area 1100. When projecting inward, the left end of the start port door member 1214 extends outward from the left end of the second start port upper shelf 1161j. When the game ball T flows down onto the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, it rolls on the second starting port upper shelf 1161j toward the left end, and flows down from the left end. . At this time, if the start door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T is received on the start door member 1214 with a very high probability. Accordingly, when the start port door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the second start port upper shelf 1161j and the start port door member 1214 are located above the second start port upper shelf 1161j and outside the left end. When the game ball T is caused to flow down, the game ball T is received on the start port door member 1214. Then, the game ball T received on the start port member 1214 is guided to the second start port 1153 by the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. When the game is accepted into the start port 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a privilege, a lottery of a special lottery result, or the like, and the player can be entertained by the privilege. At this time, the start port door member 1214 extends in the left-right direction so as to be able to receive a plurality of game balls T in the left-right direction (about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T). It is possible to cause the player to have an illusion that many game balls T are received in the second start port 1153. In detail, when a player gets used to the game in a conventional pachinko machine equipped with an opening / closing member extending to the left and right, interest in the size of the opening / closing member extending to the left and right becomes stronger. The interest is relatively weak with respect to the size of the entrance (for example, the big prize opening). That is, it is assumed that the longer the opening / closing member is, the more game balls T can be received. Therefore, the start door member 1214 that protrudes into the game area 1100 and extends to the left and right according to the gaming state is recognized as an opening / closing member in a conventional pachinko machine, and the start door member 1214 extends to the left and right. Therefore, it will be illusioned that many game balls T can be accepted. Then, when the player has an illusion, it is possible to positively perform a driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained. it can. On the other hand, the second start port 1153 through which the game ball T is guided by the start port member 1214 is actually formed to have a size that can accept only one game ball T. Even if a plurality of game balls T flow down, they are not accepted at a time, but only one at a time. Therefore, the number of game balls T received per hour can be reduced as compared with the conventional technology, and the privilege to be given is By relatively decreasing, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, when the start port member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100, the game ball T can be received in the second start port 1153 even if the second start port upper shelf 1161j is aimed in addition to the start port door member 1214. Therefore, even if the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged above the starting port door member 1214 (second starting port 1153), the left and right lengths of the starting port door member 1214 are substantially the entire length. It can be the same as receiving the game ball T over the whole, and the player can be entertained by placing a lot of game balls T. At this time, since a lower end on the left side of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j is received on the starting port door member 1214, a plurality of game balls T exist simultaneously on the second starting port upper shelf 1161j. Even then, it will be delivered one by one onto the start opening door member 1214 and guided to the second start opening 1153, so that a large number of game balls T can be prevented from being received at the second start opening 1153 at a time. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, since a second start port upper shelf 1161j and a second start port right standing wall 1161k projecting into the game area 1100 are provided on the upper and right sides of the second start port 1153, the game is started by the start port door member 1214. If the ball T is not guided to the second start port 1153, it is difficult to accept the game ball T to the second start port 1153. Accordingly, since the game ball T cannot be received in the second start port 1153 unless the start port member 1214 protrudes, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the player by the protrusion of the start port member 1214. The protrusion of the start door member 1214 can cause the player to think that there is something good, and the player's expectation for the game is raised to suppress the interest from deteriorating. Can do.

  Further, since the upright wall portion 1214e extending upward from the right end portion of the third guide portion 1214c of the start port door member 1214 is provided, the first guide portion inclined so that the right side of the start port door member 1214 is lowered. The game ball T guided toward the front side of the second start port 1153 by the 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b abuts on the standing wall portion 1214e, so that it passes the front side of the second start port 1153 and further to the right. Can be prevented from moving to the side. At this time, even if the game ball T gets over the standing wall portion 1214e, the second starting port right standing wall portion 1161k protrudes into the game area 1100 on the right side of the second starting port 1153. The right standing wall 1161k can also prevent the game ball T from moving to the right. Therefore, the game ball T received by the start port door member 1214 can be reliably guided to the second start port 1153 and received.

  In addition, since the start door member 1214 is slid forward and protrudes into the game area 1100, more games than the case where the start door member 1214 is rotated and protruded. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the start door member 1214 is easily damaged by an impact caused by receiving the ball T. More specifically, when the lower side of the start port door member is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right, and the upper side is rotated so as to move forward, the start port door member is projected. It is difficult to make the stopper for preventing further rotation from the length from the lower side to the upper side of the start door member, so that it can sufficiently resist the impact caused by receiving many game balls T. There is a possibility that it cannot be done. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start port door member 1214 is slid forward, and the rear side can be made longer than the portion of the start port door member 1214 protruding into the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently counter the impact caused by receiving many game balls T.

  Further, since the start door member 1214 is slid forward and protrudes into the game area 1100, the start door member 1214 slides backward when the game ball T exists on the start door member 1214. Then, depending on the position of the game ball T on the start port member 1214, the game ball T falls off from the start port member 1214 before being guided to the second start port 1153, and the second start port 1153. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being received, and it is possible to reduce the extra game balls T from being received and to suppress an increase in the load on the game hall side.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T that is driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation is a plurality of obstacle nails G, windmills, and center objects arranged in the game area 1100. By abutting 1130, the winning prize opening unit 1150, etc., it will circulate while moving in various directions, and the player can entertain the game ball T by making various movements. In this normal state, it is difficult for the game ball T to circulate directly below the obstacle nail G etc. on which the game ball T abuts, so that the game ball T is easy to circulate in the game area 1100. A (first area) and an area that is difficult to circulate are formed. Therefore, the game ball T is not received in the second start port 1153 arranged below the second start port upper shelf 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161. Then, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, the lower side of the second start-port upper shelf portion 1161j disposed on the downstream side in response to the detection of the game ball T that has passed therethrough The start opening door member 1214 appears to advance in the area (first area) where the game balls T in the game area 1100 are easy to flow, and is outside the area where the game balls T are easy to flow. An area (second area) where the game ball T is easy to circulate is formed in the area where the game ball T below the part 1161j is difficult to circulate. Accordingly, the distribution path of the game ball T is changed by the appearance of the start door member 1214, and the game ball T can be distributed to an area where the game ball T is difficult to distribute in a normal state. It is possible to make the player enjoy the movement of the game ball T that circulates in the region that cannot be seen (second region), and to prevent the player from becoming bored and to reduce the interest of the player.

  In addition, when the starter door member 1214 appears to move forward and the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 is guided by the starter door member 1214, it is accepted into the second starter 1153 with a very high probability. When the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a bonus, or a lottery of a special lottery result in which an advantageous game state occurs, so that when the start port member 1214 appears, It is possible to make the player actively perform the operation of driving the game ball T aiming at the start door member 1214, and to make the player entertain the operation of the game ball T and suppress the interest from deteriorating. can do.

  Further, the second start port 1153 where the game ball T is paid out, the lottery of the special lottery result, and the like is performed is arranged in a region (second region) where the game ball T is difficult to circulate when the start port door member 1214 is in a normal state. Therefore, even if the game ball T is shot at the second start port 1153, the game ball T is not received. When the starter door member 1214 advances in accordance with the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 and the game ball T can be distributed to the region where the game ball T is difficult to distribute (second region), the second start port The game ball T can be received at 1153. Therefore, even if the second start port 1153 is open in the game area 1100, the game ball T cannot be received in a normal state, and can be received unless the start port door member 1214 appears (advances). Therefore, the advancement of the start door member 1214 can give the player a premium feeling, and the advancement of the start door member 1214 may have something good for the player. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, in order to advance (appear) the start door member 1214 to form an area (second area) where the game ball T is easy to flow, it is necessary to pass the game ball T through the gate member 1134. The player can perform a game ball T driving operation (right-handed) aiming at the gate member 1134, and the player can enjoy the game ball T driving operation to reduce interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the start door member 1214 moves in the front-rear direction so as to appear and disappear in the game area 1100, it is not necessary to secure a space for the start opening door member 1214 to be immersed in the game area 1100. The area in which the game ball T circulates in the game area 1100 can be made as wide as possible, and the game sphere T circulates over a wide range, so that the movement of the game sphere T increases and the game sphere T is given to the player. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by delighting the movement of

  Further, since the flat start port door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, third guide portion 1214c, etc.) is moved in the front-rear direction, when viewed from the player side, It can be difficult to determine whether the start port door member 1214 is moving forward and appearing or retracting. Accordingly, whether or not the starter door member 1214 has appeared can be clearly recognized depending on whether or not the game ball T that has been driven into the game area 1100 flows through the position of the starter door member 1214 and comes into contact with the starter door member 1214. Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the movement of the game ball T that is thrown into the game area 1100 for recognizing the appearance state, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the game ball T flows down outside the left end of the second start port upper shelf portion 1161j in a state where the start port door member 1214 is advanced and appears, the first guide portion 1214a of the flat start port door member 1214 is formed. The second start opening upper shelf portion 1161j is guided to the lower side of the upper start opening portion 1161j so that the game ball T is difficult to circulate in a normal state where the start opening door member 1214 is immersed. The game ball T can be reliably distributed below 1161j, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the start door member 1214 is moved in the front-rear direction so as to appear in and out of the game area 1100, and the start door member is in circulation (rolling) on the upper surface of the start door member 1214. When the 1214 moves backward, or while the starting port door member 1214 is moving backward, the second starting port is changed while the direction in which it flows from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf 1161j to the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m is changed. When the game ball T flows down on the door member 144, it takes time for the game ball T to reach the second start port 1153 because the start port member 1214 extends to the left and right. Since the start opening door member 1214 is retracted in a very short time by driving the start opening solenoid 1215, the game ball T reaches the right end (third guide portion 1214c) of the start opening door member 1214. To, game ball T is that would fall from the upper starting opening the door member 1214. Accordingly, when the start opening door member 1214 starts to be retracted, the game ball T can be prevented from being sufficiently guided, so that the game ball T can be received in the second start opening 1153. It can suppress, and it can suppress that the burden of the game hall which has installed the pachinko machine 1 increases. Also, the game ball T falling from the middle of the start door member 1214 can make the player feel disappointing and can increase the expectation for the next opportunity, thereby suppressing the interest of the player from decreasing. can do.

(Second embodiment of the present invention)
Next, with reference to FIG. 142 to FIG. 144, characteristic configurations and operations in the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration and the like as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, and thus the description of the same configuration is omitted. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment.

[1. Technical idea of the second embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
A launching means capable of launching a game medium by a player's operation in the game area;
Pre-determining means for performing a lottery regarding a game when the start condition is satisfied;
State notifying means for notifying the result of the lottery in the display mode of the symbol that has been started when the symbol stop condition is satisfied, based on the lottery result of the prior determination means,
A movable member control means for controlling the movement of the receiving movable member so that the game medium can pass through the specific area in a predetermined period when a special result is obtained by the prior determination means;
Advantageous profit granting state in which a game medium that is allowed to pass through the specific area by moving the receiving movable member during the predetermined period can give a profit by passing through the specific area within a predetermined period. Profit granting state control means to control to,
When the predetermination means determines that the ratio of the special result is higher in the favorable gaming state than in the normal gaming state, and when it is controlled in the advantageous profit granting state, the advantageous profit granting state is triggered. And a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state as described above,
When the pre-determining means draws the special result and is controlled to the gaming state, the game medium is placed in the specific area before the state is stopped and displayed by the state informing means. A favorable gaming state continuation acquisition means capable of recognizing recognizing that it is controlled to the favorable gaming state after being controlled to the advantageous profit granting state when passing,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the above gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine), the launching unit (for example, the handle device 500) launches a game medium (for example, the game ball T) into the game area by the player's operation, and the preliminary determination unit (mainly The control board 1113) performs lottery (for example, random number update processing in step S1) related to the game when the start condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball T is received in the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153). Then, the state notification means (main control board 1113, peripheral control board 1116) starts symbol change display (for example, decoration symbol change display by the liquid crystal display device 1115) based on the lottery result of the pre-determination means. The result of the lottery is notified in the display mode of the symbol stopped by the establishment of the stop condition.

  The movable member control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the prize winning solenoid 1225, the V prize solenoid 1232) is selected in a specific area (for example, receiving a prize) when a special result (for example, a small hit) is drawn by the prior determination means. Part 1246a, V prize opening 1156), and controls the movement of the receiving movable member (for example, the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 and the rotating body 1236) so that the game medium can pass in a predetermined period, and the profit granting state control means The (main control board 1113) can give a profit when the game medium that has been allowed to pass through the specific area by moving the receiving movable member during a predetermined period passes through the specific area within a predetermined period. Control is made to an advantageous profit granting state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and the favorable gaming state control means (main control board 1113) is made a special result by the prior determination means. If the game is determined to be controlled to a favorable gaming state (for example, a short-time gaming state) higher than the normal gaming state, and controlled to the advantageous profit granting state, control to the favorable gaming state is triggered by the end of the advantageous profit granting state .

  Then, the good game state continuation acquisition means (peripheral control board 1116) is a special result and is selected when it is controlled to the good game state by the pre-determination means (for example, two kinds of big hits with timed out balls) (In the case of two types of big hits with short running time), if the game medium is passed through a specific area before the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means, it is controlled to the favorable profit state and then controlled to the favorable game state (For example, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the state after the big hit game that is generated is notified).

  In a conventional gaming machine, as one of the pachinko gaming machines, if the main digital is in a specific mode, it will be a big hit, a type of gaming machine (one kind of pachinko machine) that can open an attacker and obtain a lot of prize balls, and for opening A type in which a lot of prize balls can be obtained by passing a game ball through a predetermined area provided at a position where the game ball can be opened by opening the bonus game by opening the winning combination. There is known a one-kind two-kind machine in which the elements of the game machine (old two-kind pachinko machine) are mixed.

  However, although the game is diversified by making it a type 1 and type 2 compound machine like the above-mentioned game machines, it is no longer possible to improve the interest only by itself.

  Therefore, according to the present invention, when the lottery result is a special result and the lottery result is controlled to be in a favorable gaming state, the game medium is passed through a specific area before the symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, it is possible to improve the interest while satisfying the player by adding a new gameability of recognizing recognizing that it is controlled to the favorable gaming state after being controlled to the advantageous profit granting state.

  In the second embodiment of the present invention, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game, it occurs. A case will be described in which the player is suggested whether the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state or the short-time game state.

  That is, the game ball received in the receiving portion 1236a by the sliding of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit is rotated by the rotating body 1236 (from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to FIG. 124 (b)). A case will be described in which it is suggested whether or not the two types of big hits that are received by the V prize opening 1156 by rotating to a rightward position shown in FIG.

[2. Processing by peripheral control board]
Next, processing performed by the peripheral control board 1116 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. The processing by the peripheral control board 1116 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIGS. 142 to 144 every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interruption process performed by the main control board 1113 described above.

[2-1. Effect control processing by peripheral control board]
First, an effect control process executed in the peripheral control board 1116 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. First, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S100). If the peripheral control board 116 determines that it has not received the hold command (step S100: NO), it moves the process to step S103.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 has received the hold command (step S100: YES), the number of hold of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub-RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116 Is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S101), and the hold display image (image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is updated (step S102).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received from the main control board 1113 (step S103). If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the gaming state command has been received (step S103: YES), the peripheral control board 1116, based on the information included in the received gaming state command, plays the game in the short-time gaming state after the big hit game is over. It is determined whether or not it is controlled (step S104).

  When it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 has not received a game state command from the main control board 1113 (step S103: NO), when it is determined that the game is not controlled in the short-time game state after the big hit game is over. (Step S104: NO), the process proceeds to Step S106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is controlled in the short-time game state (step S104: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 occurs when a game ball is received at the V winning opening 1156 during the small hit game. An advantageous suggestion effect process is executed to suggest whether or not to shift to the short-time game after the big hit game by the liquid crystal display device 1115 (step S105).

  Here, the “advantage suggestion effect” means that when the lottery result is a small hit during a short-time game, the game ball T is placed in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol is stopped and displayed (during the variation of the symbol). This is an effect of recognizing in a recognizable manner that the gaming state is controlled to the short-time gaming state after being controlled to the big hit gaming state. Specifically, when a small hit is made during a short-time game, if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, the big hit game that occurs. It indicates to the player whether the later game state is the normal game state or the short-time game state.

  Specifically, during the short-time game, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the game after the big hit game that occurs When the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the effect image of the unlit lamp is changed to the effect image of the lit lamp for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), so that the game ball T is placed in the V winning opening 1156. If the game state after the jackpot game that is received is a normal game state or a short-time game state, that is, if a game ball is received at the V winning opening 1156, The player is notified at every small hit whether there is a short-time game. In this way, by notifying with the effect image of the lamp, the player can grasp at a glance whether or not there is a short-time game with a big hit within a limited time (within the fluctuation time).

  In the following, a case where an effect image of a lamp is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 will be described. However, even if a real lamp that does not use an image (a lamp provided in the pachinko machine 1) is turned on or off is notified. Good. Note that the notification of whether or not there is a short-time game in the big hit is not limited to the effect image of the lamp. Further, the display of the lamp lighting effect image can be clearly recognized by the player by starting from the start of the change to the end of the change.

  Furthermore, it can be from the start of the change until the winning combination winning opening 1155 is closed by the winning combination opening / closing member 1221. Further, a lamp lighting effect image may be temporarily displayed (a time that can be recognized at a glance by the player) from the start of the change to the end of the change. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not a lamp lighting effect is made, and it is possible to concentrate more on the game and improve the interest in the game.

  Thus, in order to notify the presence / absence of time reduction by executing the advantage suggesting effect, the player continuously obtains an advantageous state (big hit with time reduction) depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. It becomes possible.

  That is, based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state that occurs if the game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect, A game ball can be received by the V prize opening 1156 depending on a driving operation that matches the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 is released, so that the player can continue to win a jackpot with a short time by himself. .

  In spite of the advantage suggestion effect being executed, a game ball cannot be received in the V prize opening 1156, or a jackpot with a short time is obtained at the timing when the game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156. If the player cannot enter the normal gaming state, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed. The presence or absence is notified (the advantage suggesting effect is executed even during the subsequent short-time game).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed (step S106). Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol is specified based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from the main control board 1113. Then, based on whether or not the variation time has elapsed since receiving the variation start command, it is determined whether or not the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is not being executed (step S106: NO), the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control substrate 1113. (Step S107). If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that it has not received the change start command (step S107: NO), it moves the process to step S127.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the change start command has been received (step S107: YES), it analyzes the change start command (step S108).

  In this variation start command, as described above, determination symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or relates to the second special symbol determination This information includes information indicating whether it is a thing, setting information indicating whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach, setting information of a variation pattern, information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination is specified, it is determined whether the production with reach or the production without reach is necessary, and the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed. And the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 can be specified.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 executes a variation effect pattern selection process based on the analysis result (step S109).

  Specifically, the sub-ROM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116 has a jackpot effect table, an effect table with lose reach, an effect table with no lose reach, and an effect table with respect to the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol. At least four performance tables of the table are stored. Each of these effect tables is provided with a plurality of tables corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined on the main control board 1113.

  The peripheral control board 1116 selects one table from the plurality of tables based on the setting information included in the change start command. For example, when the setting information includes information indicating “losing”, information indicating that “reaching-free production” is performed, and information on a variation pattern indicating that the “variation time” of the special symbol is 12 seconds, The peripheral control board 1116 selects the losing-reach effect table for 12 seconds. At that time, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state based on the setting information included in the change start command, and an effect table (not shown) according to the gaming state. Select.

  In the effect table described above, effect random numbers and effect patterns are associated. The peripheral control board 1116 updates the effect random number every time the above-described random number update process is performed, acquires the value at the time of receiving the change start command, and stores a number of effect patterns stored in the selected effect table. One effect pattern is determined by reading out the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in advance.

  In this way, by performing the variation effect pattern determination process, the aspect of each effect constituting the variation effect such as the decoration pattern variation mode, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the effect button effect, the type of the background image, and the like are determined. The

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 starts the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S109 (step S110). Thereby, the fluctuating effect whose effect pattern is determined on the effect control board 130 is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1115 side speaker 130 or the like.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 updates the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S111). The process in step S111 is performed when the current special symbol variation display is related to the first special symbol determination, and is not performed when the special symbol determination is related to the second special symbol determination.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state based on the setting information included in the change start command determined to have been received in the process of step S107 ( Step S112). If it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 is not in the short-time gaming state (step S112: NO), the process proceeds to step S127.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 is in the short-time gaming state (step S112: YES), the variation start command is determined based on the information included in the variation start command received this time. It is determined whether or not it relates to special symbol determination (step S113).

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the variation effect ended this time is not the variation effect related to the second special symbol determination (step S113: NO), that is, the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination. Then, based on the determination symbol setting information included in the change start command, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the current first special symbol determination is “big hit” (step S114).

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a specific big hit (step S114: NO), it moves the process to step S127.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a specific big hit (step S114: YES), the hit notification flag stored in the sub-RAM is “ON”. (Step S115). This hit notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to notify that it is a big hit (1 type big hit or 2 type big hit) in the notification effect that is advanced with the start of the change display of the special symbol in the short-time gaming state. is there. The winning notification flag indicates that a game ball is placed in the V winning opening 1156 when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” or the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” and the small hit game is in progress. It is set to “ON” when winning. If the hit notification flag is set to “ON”, the peripheral control board 1116 moves the process to step S127.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 is the variation start command related to the second special symbol determination (step S113: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 is based on the determination symbol setting information included in the variation start command. Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the current second special symbol determination is “small hit” (step S117).

  When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S117: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 executes an advantageous suggestion effect process (step S119). That is, similarly to the process of step S105, the game after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. An effect for suggesting to the player whether the state is the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state is executed. The peripheral control board 1116 moves the process to step S127 when the advantageous suggestion effect process is executed.

  In spite of the advantage suggestion effect being executed, a game ball cannot be received in the V prize opening 1156, or a jackpot with a short time is obtained at the timing when the game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156. If the player cannot enter the normal gaming state, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed. The presence or absence is notified (the advantage suggesting effect is executed even during the subsequent short-time game).

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not “small hit” (step S117: NO), the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S118).

  When the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit” (step S118: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 shifts the processing to step S115 to notify “big hit”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “losing” (step S118: NO), it is determined whether or not a start command related to the big hit game is received from the main control board 1113. (Step S127). If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that it has not received the start command related to the big hit game from the main control board 1113 (step S127: NO), it moves the process to step S133.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the start command related to the big hit game has been received (step S127: YES), whether or not the hit notification flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S115. Determination is made (step S128). If it is determined that the hit notification flag is not set to “ON” (step S128: NO), the peripheral control board 1116 causes the liquid crystal display device 1115 to start a predetermined start effect (step S129).

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the hit notification flag is set to “ON” (step S128: YES), the liquid crystal display device 1115 provides an effect of notifying “big hit” as the start effect. It starts (step S130), and the hit notification flag is set to “OFF” (step S131).

  The peripheral control board 1116 determines whether a round start command is received from the main control board 1113 (step S133). If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that it has not received a round start command from the main control board 1113 (step S133: NO), it moves the process to step S135.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the round start command has been received (step S133: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 causes the liquid crystal display device 1115 to start the effect during the round (step S134). As a result, the current number of rounds and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 are updated.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not an end command related to the big hit game is received from the main control board 1113 (step S135). If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that it has not received an end command related to the big hit game from the main control board 1113 (step S135: NO), it moves the process to step S139.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the end command related to the jackpot game has been received (step S135: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 causes the liquid crystal display device 1115 to start a predetermined end effect (step S136).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a start command related to the small hit game is received from the main control board 1113 (step S139). If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that it has not received the start command related to the small hit game from the main control board 1113 (step S139: NO), it moves the process to step S141.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the start command related to the small hit game has been received (step S139: YES), it sets the small hit flag stored in the sub-RAM to “ON” (step S139: YES). Step S140). This small hitting flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small hitting game is possible so that a game ball can be received in the V winning opening 1156 by sliding the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221, and the main control board 1113. When the start command related to the small hit game is received from “ON”, it is set to “ON”, and when the end command related to the small hit game is received, it is set to “OFF”.

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the small hitting flag is set to “ON” (step S141). If the peripheral control board 1118 determines that the small hitting flag is not set to “ON” (step S141: NO), it moves the process to step S144.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hitting flag is set to “ON” (step S141: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not a V winning command is received from the main control board 1113. (Step S142). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball T received by the receiving unit 1236a by the sliding of the accessory prize winning opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit game is received by the V winning opening 1156 by the rotation of the rotating body 1236. Determine.

  If it is determined that the peripheral control board 1116 has not received the V prize command from the main control board 1113 (step S142: NO), the peripheral control board 1116 moves the process to step S144 while the V control command is sent from the main control board 1113. If it is determined that it has been received (step S142: YES), the hit notification flag stored in the sub-RAM is set to “ON” (step S143).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not an end command related to the small hit game has been received (step S144). If the peripheral control board 166 determines that the end command related to the small hit game has not been received (step S144: NO), the effect control process ends.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control board 1116 determines that an end command related to the small hit game has been received (step S144: YES), it sets the small hit flag to “OFF” (step S145).

  Next, the peripheral control board 1116 determines whether or not the hit notification flag is set to “ON” (step S146). When it is determined that the hit notification flag is set to “ON” (step S146: YES), the peripheral control board 1116 ends the effect control process.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the hit notification flag is not set to “ON” (step S146: NO), the peripheral control board 1116 starts an effect to notify the loss (step S147). That is, during the small hit game, the game ball is not received in the V winning opening 1156, and when the small hit game is ended, the liquid crystal display device 1115 starts an effect of notifying “losing”.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 sets the hit notification flag stored in the sub RAM to “OFF” (step S148). The peripheral control board 1116 ends the effect control process when the hit notification flag is set to “OFF”.

  Note that, as described above, the open / close pattern for opening / closing the accessory winning award 1155 determined based on the small winning design random number is received from the main control board 1113. For this reason, you may alert | report the opening timing of the prize winning opening 1155 based on an opening / closing pattern in the advantageous suggestion effect process of step S105 and step S119 mentioned above. In this way, by notifying the opening timing of the prize winning opening 1155, it is possible to facilitate the driving operation by matching the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened.

(Third embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration and operation in the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration and the like as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention. To do. Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment.

[1. Technical idea of the third embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
Lottery means for performing lottery when the lottery conditions are satisfied;
State notifying means for notifying that the game related to the lottery by the lottery means is in progress by displaying the symbol in a variable manner, and notifying that the game has been completed by stopping and displaying the symbol;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, it is impossible or difficult to control the movement of the receiving movable member to pass the game medium to a specific area provided at a position related to the receiving movable member. A movable member control means capable of controlling the first state from the first state to a second state that is easier to pass to the specific region;
A profit granting means for granting a profit when the game medium passes through the specific area;
When the ratio of the lottery result to the specific result is a high specific result that can be controlled to a high profit gaming state higher than usual, the high profit gaming state is controlled when the grant of the profit is completed High profit gaming state giving means that can be,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, before the game is started and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means, it is possible to present whether it is controlled to the high profit state after the grant of the profit is finished. Profit presentation means;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the lottery means (main control board 1113) receives the game ball T at the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153 when the lottery condition is satisfied (for example, the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153). The lottery is performed in response to the event, and the state notification means (main control board 1113, peripheral control board 1116) notifies that the game related to the lottery by the lottery means is in progress by variably displaying the symbol, The end of the game is notified by stopping the display of the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol is variably displayed or stopped by the liquid crystal display device 1115).

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the movable member control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the prize winning solenoid 1225, the V prize solenoid 1232) receives the movable movable member (for example, the prize winning opening / closing member for the bonus item). 1221, the rotating body 1236) is controlled so that a game medium (for example, a game ball T) to a specific area (for example, the receiving portion 1246a, the V winning opening 1156) provided at a position related to the receiving movable member is controlled. Control is made from the first state, which is impossible or difficult to pass, to the second state in which the passage to the specific region is easier than the first state (for example, the receiving portion 1246a is closed by the sliding of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221) And the profit granting means (main control board 1113) grants a profit (for example, a big hit) when the game medium passes through the specific area, The profitable game state giving means (main control board 1113) is able to control the high specific result that can be controlled to a high profit game state (for example, short-time game state) in which the ratio of the lottery result to the specific result (for example, small hit) is higher than usual If it is, the high profit gaming state is controlled when the grant of profit is completed.

  The high profit presentation means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116), when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the symbol is stopped and displayed 1000 times continuously in the normal gaming state without entering the big hit gaming state). Before the game is started and the symbol is stopped and displayed by the state notification means, after the grant of profit is completed (for example, after the big hit game is finished), it is controlled to a high profit state (for example, whether the game becomes a short-time game state) (For example, before a symbol is stopped and displayed, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the state after the big hit game that is generated is notified).

  As a conventional gaming machine, a lottery is executed based on the winning of a game ball at a starting port (for example, the first starting port or the second starting port). There is a pachinko machine that gives an advantageous profit according to the lottery result. In such a pachinko machine, the game interest is improved by changing the degree of advantage of the benefit to be given depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

  However, since gaming machines that vary the degree of benefit to be given depending on whether or not specific conditions such as the above-mentioned gaming machines are satisfied are not new, they satisfy players who seek further gaming interests. It is getting harder to do.

  Therefore, according to the present invention, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the lottery result becomes the specific result after the game is started and the provision of the profit due to the game medium passing through the specific area is finished before the symbol is stopped and displayed. It is presented so that it can be discriminated whether the ratio is controlled to a high profit state higher than usual.

  In this case, it is assumed that “predetermined conditions have been met”, and in the following, the lottery result is obtained by continuously displaying the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1115 1000 times without being in the big hit gaming state. A case where is displayed will be described. Specifically, it is assumed that a predetermined condition is established when the symbol change display is made 1000 times without entering the big hit gaming state, that is, the so-called stuck state.

  In addition, “a specific area provided at a position related to the receiving movable member” means that the game ball is received into the specific area if the game medium is received by the receiving movable member, The receiving movable member and the specific region may or may not be a unit. Further, even if the specific area is not provided at a position close to the receiving movable member, the game ball moves so that the game ball can be received into the specific area when the game medium is received by the receiving movable member. For example, the receiving movable member and the specific region may be provided at a distance away from each other. In other words, the receiving movable member and the specific area only need to have a structure in which the game medium received by the receiving movable member by movement is received into the specific area.

  Furthermore, the “first state where it is impossible or difficult to pass the game medium” means that the game medium cannot pass through the specific area, or the second state where the game medium can easily pass through the specific area. It means that the game medium is less likely to pass than the state, but may rarely pass.

  In the third embodiment of the present invention, the second special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game when the variable display count reaches 1000 times without the big hit game state during the normal game. If a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result (lottery result) is displayed, the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal game state, or in the short-time game state A case where the player is suggested whether or not there is will be described.

  In other words, when the number of times the symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the normal gaming state without reaching the big hit gaming state reaches 1000 times, the bonus winning opening / closing member 1221 is received by sliding during the small hitting. Suppose that the game ball received in the part 1236a is received in the V prize opening 1156 by the rotation of the rotating body 1236 (from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b)). A case will be described in which it is suggested whether or not the type 2 big hit that is generated is a short hit big hit.

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The processing in the third embodiment of the present invention executes processing substantially similar to the processing by the main control board and the processing by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the third embodiment of the present invention, the number of times the symbols indicating the lottery results are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state without entering the big hit gaming state is the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116 (not shown). ) Is stored cumulatively, and an advantageous suggestion effect is executed when the stored number of times (cumulative fluctuation number) has reached a predetermined number (1000 in this embodiment).

  Specifically, based on the change start command transmitted from the main control board 1113 in step S309 during the normal gaming state, the peripheral control board 1116 indicates the number of times the decorative symbol is displayed in a variably manner on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (cumulative change count). The RAM is counted.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the gaming state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the cumulative fluctuation count counted by the RAM is 1000 times or more. It is determined whether or not.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 1000 or more, the peripheral control board 1116 executes an advantage suggesting effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 1000 times or more, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the short-time game (not shown). Then, if the game state after the big hit game that is generated if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 is the short-time game state, the effect image of the lamp that has been turned off is displayed. If the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 by changing to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal game state, or in the short-time game state In other words, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the player is notified at every small hit whether there is a short time in the big hit that occurs.

  In spite of the advantage suggestion effect being executed, a game ball cannot be received in the V prize opening 1156, or a jackpot with a short time is obtained at the timing when the game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156. If the player cannot enter the normal gaming state, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed. The presence or absence is notified (the advantage suggesting effect is executed even during the subsequent short-time game).

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 clears the cumulative number of fluctuations counted by the RAM when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the big hit game state. Note that, by adopting a configuration that backs up the cumulative fluctuation count, the cumulative fluctuation count can be continuously counted even when the power is shut off.

  Thus, in order to notify the presence / absence of time reduction by executing the advantage suggestion effect, the player continues an advantageous state (big hit with time reduction) depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. Can be obtained.

  That is, based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state that occurs if the game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect, A game ball can be received by the V prize opening 1156 depending on the driving operation in accordance with the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 is released, so that the player can continuously obtain a jackpot with a short time. .

  Further, when it is determined that the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state without being in the big hit gaming state, the advantage suggesting effect is executed. Therefore, it can be a remedy for the long-term progress of the game in a gaming state unfavorable to the player.

  In other words, if a long-term game is played in the normal game state without entering the big hit game state, it is disadvantageous for the player. However, even if the disadvantageous normal gaming state continues for a long time, if the bonus game state changes from the big hit game state to the short-time game state after that, the player will continue to make a short hit big hit by executing the advantage suggesting effect. It becomes possible to make a game advantageous by obtaining.

  In addition, even if the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player continues, it may be possible to continuously get a bonus with a short time by executing the advantage suggesting effect from the jackpot gaming state to the time-saving gaming state afterwards. Therefore, the expectation can be improved in spite of the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, when the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the normal gaming state without being in the big hit gaming state is close to 1000 times (for example, 800 times or more, 900 times or more, etc.) It can be thrilled whether or not the advantage suggesting effect is executed because the cumulative number of fluctuations becomes 1000 times in spite of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

  The number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state without displaying the big hit gaming state is displayed in a region other than the region where the symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. (Not shown), the player can clearly grasp the cumulative number of fluctuations while paying attention to the symbol indicating the lottery result.

  In the third embodiment described above, a case where the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state without assuming the big hit gaming state as “predetermined conditions are met”. As described above, it can be assumed that the predetermined condition described above is satisfied when the player is stopped and displayed 1000 times without entering the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state.

  Further, the case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously during the normal gaming state has been described, but the lottery result is shown on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state and the normal gaming state. This can be the case where the symbol is stopped and displayed 1000 times. Specifically, when the gaming state transitions to the short-time gaming state after the big-hitting gaming state, when the number of times stopped and displayed during the short-time gaming state and the normal gaming state reaches 1000 times, The effect suggesting effect is executed.

  Furthermore, although the case where 1000 times of stop display was demonstrated was demonstrated, it is not restricted to 1000 times. However, it is desirable that the number of times that the player suggests the advantage suggesting effect is 500 times, 1000 times, 1500 times, etc. that are easy to remember.

  In addition, the number of times of stop display can be determined at random from a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, one is randomly determined from 500 times, 1000 times, and 1500 times. The determination of the number of times is based on the fact that the short-time gaming state has ended and the normal gaming state has been reached, and that the game ball T has been received at the first starting port 1152 (or the second starting port 1153) during this normal gaming state. You may decide to. In this way, the game can be diversified by randomly determining the number of times.

  When the number of times is determined randomly as described above, the determined number of times may be notified to the player. In this way, by notifying the determined number of times, for example, when 500 times out of 500 times, 1000 times, and 1500 times are decided, the player may think that they are lucky today. Therefore, the expectation for the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the number of times determined is not notified to the player, for example, when the number of times that the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state reaches 600 times, The player can be thrilled until the time-short gaming state is reached (until the advantage suggesting effect is executed) whether the number of times played is 500 times or 1000 times.

  Furthermore, it may be determined whether or not to notify the presence or absence of time reduction by a lottery executed every predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 500 times). For example, when it is determined that the number of fluctuations is 500 and it is determined whether or not there is a short time, it is not necessary to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to notify every subsequent number of fluctuations. And when it is decided to alert | report, it can improve the feeling of expectation to a short-time gaming state by alerting | reporting before it will be in a short-time gaming state.

  In addition, the number of times that the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is a multiple of the average number of times the variable display is performed with a game ball lent out at 1000 yen (for example, a game lent out at 1000 yen) By changing the average number of changes 20 times x 25 = 500 times and the average number of changes 20 times x 50 = 1000 times, the game will be a big hit game state. By making the player think that the advantage suggesting effect may be executed in the short-time gaming state, the willingness to continue the game can be improved.

  In the above case, since there is a gaming machine with a different fee for game balls in recent years, the average number of times of change display in which change display is performed with game balls lent out at 1000 yen in the case of 4 yen per game ball In the case of 20 times that is 1 yen per game ball, it can be a multiple of 40 times, which is the average number of times of change display on the game balls lent out at 1000 yen.

  Further, it can be determined according to the game balls that are lent out when the ball rental button 361 for starting the rental of game balls from the ball rental machine is operated once. In other words, in the case of 4 yen per game ball, 500 yen of game balls are lent out by one operation, and the average number of times of change display is 10 times that the display of change is performed with the rented game balls, In the case of 1 yen per game ball, 200 yen of game balls are lent out in a single operation, and a multiple of 16 times, which is the average number of times of change display is performed on the rented game balls. can do.

  Further, as “a predetermined condition is satisfied”, for example, when a small hit is provided even in the normal gaming state, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the small hit reaches a predetermined number of times. it can. Note that the number of small hits may be determined at random as in the case where the number of fluctuations described above is determined at random.

  In the third embodiment of the present invention, the case where the advantage suggesting effect is executed in the case of the so-called stuck state as “the predetermined condition is satisfied” has been described, but a specific symbol (for example, “7”) is described. If you win a big hit at a specific reach, if you win a big hit at a specific reach, or if you win a big hit when you display a certain number of reach, then you will perform an advantage suggestion effect during the subsequent short game state May be. In this case, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the game by making the player think that he is lucky today.

  Further, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect may be made different depending on “the predetermined condition is satisfied”. Specifically, if the number of times that the stop symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state is 200 times or less, it is notified whether or not it is a big hit with one short time during the short-time gaming state. If it is more than 500 times and less than 500 times, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started when the remaining time-short game is 20 times, and if it is 501 times or more, the advantage-imposing effect is always executed during the time-short game state. In this way, by executing the advantage suggesting effect differently depending on the condition in the normal gaming state, the type of relief can be changed depending on the so-called stuck state in the normal gaming state.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment of the present invention, a case has been described in which an advantage suggesting effect is executed in a so-called stuck state as “predetermined conditions are met”, but a predetermined time (for example, 90 minutes) ) When the game is continued, the advantage suggesting effect may be executed. That is, it may be determined whether or not the game is continued for a predetermined time based on time (timer).

  When the advantage suggesting effect is executed when the game is continued for a predetermined time as described above, the game ball T is not received at the first start port 1152 during the normal game for a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes). If the operation of the handle device 500 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes), the player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 is not detected for a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) by a sensor or the like. When it is determined that the player is not playing a game, the time (timer) is reset, and when the game is played again, the time is newly counted.

  The lottery result was displayed by displaying the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1115 stopped 1000 times continuously in the normal gaming state without entering the big hit gaming state as “predetermined conditions were met”. Although the case has been described, it may be a case where the lottery result is displayed 1000 times with a special symbol or a normal symbol on the function indicator 1114, or when the lottery regarding the game is performed 1000 times without becoming a big hit gaming state It may be.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to notify only the player who has continued the game for a long time, whether or not it is a big hit with a short time by an advantage suggesting effect. For this reason, it is possible to rescue only a player who is in a so-called stuck state. Moreover, since the player who plays the pachinko machine 1 tries to continue the game for a long time, the operation rate can be improved.

(Characteristic effects of the second and third embodiments of the present invention)
The second and third embodiments of the present invention described above have the same functions and effects as those of the first embodiment of the present invention, but also have the following functions and effects.

  In the embodiment of the present invention, if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect even before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time game. By providing a pachinko machine to which a new gameability is added that suggests to the player the game state after the occurrence of the big hit game, the player is satisfied and the decrease in interest is suppressed.

  That is, in order to notify the liquid crystal display device 1115 of the gaming state after the end of the big hit game, which is generated if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect during the short-time game, before the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 If the player receives a game ball in the V prize opening 1156, the prize winning opening 1155 is given by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game is the short-time gaming state. A game ball can be received in the V prize opening 1156 by performing a driving operation that matches the timing at which the game is released. For this reason, the player can realize a novel gameability that allows him / her to continuously obtain a jackpot with a short time, thereby improving the interest.

  In particular, before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, that is, while the decorative symbol is fluctuating on the liquid crystal display device 1115, an effect suggestion effect is performed, whereby It is possible to secure time for performing the driving operation in accordance with the timing at which 1155 is released.

  Further, an effect image of a lamp that is extinguished is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and the game state after the big hit game that is generated when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 is the short-time game state. In this case, the presence / absence of time reduction is notified by changing the effect image of the lamp that has been turned off to the effect image of the lamp that has been turned on. In this way, the player can recognize at a glance whether or not there is a shortage of time by notifying the lamp off or lighting images, thus giving many players a useful opportunity to continue the jackpot with a short time. Can do.

  In addition, an effect image of a lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and a game state after a big hit game that occurs if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 during a short-time game is displayed. Whether or not the game is in the short-time game state is notified for each small hit, so that every time the lottery result becomes a two-type big hit with a short time (see FIG. 126), the player can be given a chance to win a short-time big hit.

  In this way, since the advantage suggesting effect is executed before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, the player secures time to prepare for the execution of the time-saving jackpot game. be able to. In other words, when the player is informed that the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state by the advantageous suggestion effect, the player is actively aiming for the game ball T to pass through the V winning opening 1156. I do. However, for example, when there is no game ball T to be launched aiming at the V prize opening 1156 (when there is no game ball T on the upper plate 301), the time for lending the game ball T (adjacent to the pachinko machine 1) It is necessary to insert cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided and press the ball lending button 361), so that the advantage suggesting effect is executed after the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. And there is a risk of missing a chance to win a jackpot with a short time.

  However, by executing the advantage suggesting effect before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed, the player may prepare the game ball T or the like in advance so as not to miss the chance to win the jackpot with a short time. it can. For this reason, it is possible to prevent missing a chance to win a jackpot with a short time, and to prepare for not missing a chance to win a jackpot with a short time, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate. .

  Then, in order to notify the presence / absence of a short time by executing the advantage suggesting effect, the player may continuously obtain an advantageous state (a big hit with a short time) depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. It becomes possible.

  In addition, despite the fact that the advantage suggesting effect is being executed, the game ball T cannot be received in the V winning opening 1156, or a big hit with a short time is obtained at the timing when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156. If the player cannot enter the normal gaming state, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed. However, when the big hit gaming state and the short-time gaming state are repeated without being in the normal gaming state, the bonus time is shortened for each small hit. Is notified whether or not there is (the advantage suggesting effect is executed during the subsequent short-time game). For this reason, it is possible to continue the jackpot with a shortened time, and can provide a lot of players with a valuable opportunity.

  Further, if the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously in the normal gaming state without becoming the big hit gaming state, the advantage suggesting effect is executed, which is disadvantageous for the player. It can be a remedy for a long-running game in the gaming state.

  In addition, since it can be a remedy for a long-running game in a gaming state unfavorable to the player, it is possible to prevent the game from being disliked by the long-lasting normal gaming state and stopping the game. Therefore, the operation rate can be improved.

  Furthermore, despite the fact that the advantage suggesting effect is being executed, a game ball cannot be received in the V prize opening 1156, or a jackpot with a shortened time is obtained depending on the timing at which the game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156. If the player cannot enter the normal gaming state, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed.However, if the big hit gaming state and the short-time gaming state are repeated without being in the normal gaming state, the time is reduced to the big hit every small hit. The presence or absence is notified (the advantage suggesting effect is executed even during the subsequent short-time game). For this reason, it is possible to continue the jackpot with a shortened time, and can provide a lot of players with a valuable opportunity.

  In addition, even if the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player continues, it may be possible to continuously get a bonus with a short time by executing the advantage suggesting effect from the jackpot gaming state to the time-saving gaming state afterwards. Therefore, the expectation can be improved in spite of the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, when the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the normal gaming state without being in the big hit gaming state is close to 1000 times (for example, 800 times or more, 900 times or more, etc.) It can be thrilled whether or not the advantage suggesting effect is executed because the cumulative number of fluctuations becomes 1000 times in spite of the normal gaming state which is disadvantageous to the player.

  In addition, the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the normal gaming state without displaying the big hit gaming state is displayed in a region other than the region where the decorative symbol of the liquid crystal display device 1115 is displayed. (Not shown), the player can clearly grasp the cumulative number of fluctuations while paying attention to the decorative symbol indicating the lottery result.

  And, when the “predetermined condition is satisfied”, the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed 1000 times on the liquid crystal display device 1115 continuously in the normal gaming state without becoming the big hit gaming state. In addition, when a condition that is not intended by the player (the player cannot be involved) is satisfied, the game can be made more and more exciting and the interest can be enhanced.

(Other embodiments of the first to third embodiments of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic configuration and operation of other embodiments of the first to third embodiments of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine 1 according to another embodiment has substantially the same configuration and the like as the pachinko machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments of the present invention, and thus the description of the same configuration is omitted. And

[1. Rotation mode of rotating body]
In the above-described embodiment, by performing the process of rotating the rotator 1236 from the upward position (standby position) shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. In the above description, the game ball T received by the receiving unit 1236a can be received by the V winning opening 1156. However, other rotation modes may be used.

  Specifically, the rotating body 1236 waits in the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b), and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the rotating body 1236 is rotated to the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a). The game ball T can be received in the portion 1236a. Then, the player can be throbbing with respect to whether or not the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a by the opening / closing pattern of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 determined based on the small winning design random number, It is possible to enhance the player's interest by increasing the sense of expectation for receiving the game ball T.

[2. Suggestion by advantageous suggestion effect]
In the embodiment described above, an effect image of a lamp that is extinguished is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time game as an advantage suggesting effect (not shown), and it occurs when a game ball is received at the V prize opening 1156. In the case where the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state, the case where the presence / absence of the shortage is notified by changing the effect image of the unlit lamp to the effect image of the lit lamp has been described. Other embodiments can be adopted.

  Specifically, when a small hit is made during a short-time game, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, Whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a short-time gaming state can be displayed in characters such as “There is a short time!” Or “No short time!”. Thus, by displaying with characters, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the presence or absence of time reduction.

  In addition, the presence or absence of a short time can be notified by changing the color of the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. Specifically, if a game ball is received at the V winning opening 1156, when the game state after the big hit game is a short-time game state, the decoration symbol is displayed in a rainbow color or the like, which is different from a normal decoration symbol. By displaying in color, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of time reduction while paying attention to the variation of the decorative design.

  Furthermore, the presence or absence of time reduction can be notified by changing the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. Specifically, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the cat character is displayed when the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state, and the game state after the big hit game is shortened. In the gaming state, by displaying the dog character, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of time reduction while diversifying the production mode.

  Moreover, the presence or absence of a short time can be notified by vibrating the pressing operation part 405 which a player can press. Specifically, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the pressing operation unit 405 is vibrated when the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the short-time game state, and the game state after the big hit game is the normal game By virtue of stronger vibration and longer vibration in the short-time gaming state than in the state, an action such as a player hitting the glass unit 590 can be suppressed.

  That is, when notifying the presence or absence of time reduction by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, many players operate the handle device 500 with the right hand to drive the game ball T into the game area 1100, and the left hand uses the pressing operation unit. Both hands are blocked because 405 is touched. In this state, it becomes difficult to perform an action such as hitting the glass unit 590 to insert a game ball into the prize winning port 1155, the receiving portion 1236a, and the V winning port 1156, so that damage to the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. can do.

  In addition to the vibration, the effect as described above can be achieved even if the presence or absence of a short time is notified by air from the pressing operation unit 405.

[3. Continuation of advantageous suggestion]
In the above-described embodiment, the game ball T cannot be received in the V winning opening 1156 or the time is shortened depending on the timing at which the game ball 1 is received in the V winning opening 1156 even though the advantage suggesting effect is executed. The case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the short game state is reached in the subsequent game even if the bonus game cannot be obtained and the normal game state is obtained has been described. It may be determined whether or not the performance is executed.

  Specifically, it is possible to execute the advantage suggesting effect only during the short-time game related to the first game, and not to execute the advantage-impliciting effect when the time-short game state is reached in the subsequent games. In addition, the following games only when the predetermined conditions are met at the time of the first win (such as a big win with a specific design, a big win with a specific random number, a big hit with a specific reach, etc.) In this case, the advantage suggesting effect may be executed when the time-short gaming state is reached. By executing the advantage suggesting effect in this way, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the first hit, and further, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine with new game play added.

  Further, the execution mode of the advantage suggesting effect can be changed in the subsequent games depending on the number of times of fluctuation in the normal gaming state until the time-saving big hit game is reached. For example, when the number of changes in the normal gaming state until the time-saving big hit game is 200, the advantage suggesting effect is executed only during the time-saving game related to the first hit, and in the subsequent games, The advantage suggesting effect is not executed when it becomes, but when the number of fluctuations in the normal game state is 1000, the advantage suggesting effect is executed even when the game becomes the short-time game state in the subsequent game. Can be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide relief for a game that has progressed for a long time in a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player.

  Furthermore, the number of executions of the advantage suggesting effects can be changed in subsequent games according to the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state until the time-saving big hit game. For example, if the number of fluctuations in the normal game state until it becomes a jackpot game with a short time is 200, the advantage suggesting effect is executed only twice including the short time game related to the first hit, and the game after the third time In the short-time game state, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed. However, when the number of changes in the normal game state is 1000, the advantage suggesting effect is limited to seven times including the short-time game related to the first game. It is possible to configure so that the advantage suggesting effect is not executed when the time-short game state is entered in the eighth and subsequent games. By configuring in this way, for example, in the case where the advantage suggesting effect is executed only 7 times including the short time game related to the first win, it becomes a big hit without a short time during the second short time game, and the normal game state after the big hit game Even if it becomes, the advantage suggestion effect will be executed if it becomes a jackpot with a short time, and if the jackpot with a short time may be obtained continuously, it can give the player a sense of expectation and improve the occupancy rate Can be made.

[4. Suggestion Timing of Advantage Suggestion Production]
In the above-described embodiment, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time game, so that if the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156, the game after the big hit game that occurs Although the case where the game state is always notified (notification for every small hit) will be described, cases where the notification is made and cases where the notification is not made (when the advantage suggesting effect is executed and when not executed) can be provided.

  Specifically, it is possible to add a new gameability by providing a period that is easy to be notified during a short-time game and a period that is difficult to be notified (a game period that is always notified and a game period that is not always notified). . For example, during 100 short-time games, 1 game to 20 games are easy to be notified, 21 games to 40 games are difficult to be notified, 41 games to 60 games are easy to be notified, 61 games to 80 games are difficult to be notified, 81 games The 100 games are easily notified. By providing a period in this way, it is possible to improve the expectation for a period that is easy to be notified, and to dramatically reduce the decrease in interest during the time by making the driving operation by the player different. Can do.

  In addition, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the time of the first hit (when a big win with a specific symbol, a big win with a specific random number, a big hit with a specific reach, etc.), it is easy to be notified. If the period is lengthened and the predetermined condition is not satisfied at the first hit, the period during which the notification is easier to be made can be shortened than when the predetermined condition is satisfied at the first hit. By providing a period in this way, the sense of expectation can be improved with respect to the initial hit.

  In addition, the advantage suggesting effect may be executed only in the case of a change in which a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the advantage suggesting effect may be executed only when the small hitting design random number acquired by the main control board 1113 is a specific random number (in the case of a specific design). As described above, by performing the advantage suggesting effect only when the small hitting design random number is a specific random number, it is possible to improve the expectation for the specific design.

  Furthermore, when the small hitting design random number acquired by the main control board 1113 is a specific random number, the advantage suggesting effect may be executed without fail during the subsequent time reduction. In addition, when the small winning design random number is a specific random number, the advantage suggesting effect may be executed only for a predetermined short time period (for example, for 20 games). Furthermore, when the advantage suggesting effect is always executed during the subsequent time reduction, and the advantage suggesting effect is always executed only during the predetermined short time period thereafter, the small hit design random number may include a variation that was a specific random number. However, it is possible to set the subsequent short time period and the predetermined predetermined short time period without including the fluctuation in which the small hitting design random number is a specific random number. By comprising in this way, expectation can be improved with respect to execution to an advantage suggestion production.

(Fourth embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration and operation in the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration and the like as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on embodiment mentioned above.

[1. Technical idea of the fourth embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea 1.
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Lottery means for drawing lots related to games;
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the passage control means capable of controlling the passage-permitted state that allows the game medium to pass through the specific area;
Profit grant control means for controlling the profit grant state when the game medium passes through the specific area;
Normal acquisition means that can be controlled to a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a predetermined rate based on the result of the lottery after the profit granting state when passing the game medium to the specific area;
When a predetermined condition is established by the operation of the operation means, the advantage over the normal state after the profit granting state is ended even though the predetermined ratio is the same when the game medium passes through the specific area. A gaming machine comprising: an acquisition unit with notification that can increase a rate controlled by a gaming state.

  In the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the operating means (for example, the handle device 500) can be operated by the player, and the lottery means (for example, the main control board 1113) performs lottery regarding the game (for example, When the game ball T is received at the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153, a lottery is performed).

  Further, the passage control means (for example, the main control board 1113) places a game medium (for example, a game ball T) in a specific area (for example, the receiving unit 1246a, the V winning opening 1156) based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means. The profit granting control means (for example, the main control board 1113) controls to the profit granting state when the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, changes the gaming state to the big hit gaming state). The normal acquisition means (for example, the main control board 11113) is more advantageous than the normal state and the normal state at a predetermined rate based on the result of the lottery after the profit granting state when passing the game medium to the specific area. Control to an advantageous state (for example, control to a normal gaming state or a short-time gaming state after the end of the big hit game).

  When the predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation of the operation unit, the notification acquisition unit (for example, the peripheral control board 1116), when the game medium passes through the specific area, although the predetermined ratio is the same, After the profit granting state is finished, the rate of controlling to the advantageous gaming state can be made higher than the normal state (for example, by proceeding the game so that the player does not accept the game ball in the V winning opening 1156 during the short-time game, In order to notify the state after the big hit game that is generated if the game ball is received at the V winning opening 1156 when the number of times of the change display of the symbol in the short-time game reaches 80 times without being in the big hit game state, The more you can earn).

  As a conventional gaming machine, when the main digital is in a specific mode, it is advantageous to a player when a game ball passes through a special area by opening a movable piece or the like with a one-type pachinko machine that shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player. There is known a type 1 type 2 multi-function machine in which two elements of an old type 2 pachinko machine that shifts to a gaming state are mixed.

  However, since the type 1 and type 2 multifunction machine as described above is no longer a novelty, it is becoming difficult to satisfy a player who seeks further entertainment.

  Therefore, according to the present invention, when a predetermined condition is established by operating the operating means that can be operated by the player, the game state is controlled to be more advantageous than the normal state after the profit granting state when the game medium passes through the specific area. Realize innovative gameplay that can increase the percentage of interest and suppress the decline of interest.

  In the following description, it is assumed that “a predetermined condition is satisfied” by the operation of the operation means, so that the player does not accept the game ball at the V winning opening 1156 during the short-time game by the driving operation by the handle device 500 as the operation means. A case will be described in which the number of times of variable display of the symbols during the short-time game reaches 80 times due to the progress of the game without becoming a big hit game state.

  In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times the symbols are changed during the short-time game is 80 times without being in a big hit game state by the driving operation of the game ball T by the player operating the handle device 500. If the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game, A case will be described in which the player is informed whether the subsequent game state is the normal game state or the short-time game state.

  That is, when the number of times that the symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the short-time gaming state without reaching the big hit gaming state by the player's driving operation of the game ball T, the opening / closing member The game ball received in the receiving portion 1236a by sliding the 1221 is a V prize when the rotating body 1236 rotates (from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the right position shown in FIG. 124 (b)). If it is accepted into the mouth 1156, it is suggested until the time-short game is over whether or not the type 2 big hit that is generated is a short-time big hit (for example, a big hit occurs even if the pattern changes 80 times in the short-time game state) If not, it will be suggested in the remaining 20 times).

  Then, despite the fact that the probability of occurrence of a jackpot with a short time does not change, the game ball T is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by a driving operation of the game ball T by notifying that the game state after the big hit game is a time-short game state. A case where the probability of a jackpot with a time reduction can be increased will be described.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea 2.
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Lottery means for drawing lots related to games;
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the passage control means capable of controlling the passage-permitted state that allows the game medium to pass through the specific area;
Profit grant control means for controlling the profit grant state when the game medium passes through the specific area;
Normal acquisition means that can be controlled to a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a predetermined rate based on the result of the lottery after the profit granting state when passing the game medium to the specific area;
When a predetermined condition is established by the operation of the operation means, the advantage over the normal state after the profit granting state is ended even though the predetermined ratio is the same when the game medium passes through the specific area. An acquisition means with notification that can increase the rate controlled by the gaming state,
Acquiring means capable of executing the notification The predetermined condition is a gaming machine that can be executed by abandoning profits by not allowing the acquiring means to pass the game medium to the specific area.

  Even in the above technical idea 2, as in the above technical idea 1, the fluctuation of the symbol during the short-time game without entering the big hit game state by the driving operation of the game ball T by the player operating the handle device 500 When the number of times of display reaches 80, the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the determination result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game. For example, it is possible to indicate to the player whether the game state after the big hit game that is generated is a normal game state or a short-time game state.

  Then, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the probability that a short-time big hit will occur by suggesting whether the game state after the big hit game that is generated is a normal game state or a short-time game state Despite the fact that the game state after the big hit game is not changed, the game ball T is received by the V winning opening 1156 by the operation of driving the game ball T by the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state, and the big hit with a short time is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of a big hit with a short time.

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The process according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention performs substantially the same process as the process by the main control board and the process by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116 indicates the number of times the symbols indicating the lottery results are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state without entering the big hit gaming state. In the case where the stored number of times (cumulative fluctuation number) has reached a predetermined number (80 times in the present embodiment), an advantageous suggestion effect is executed.

  Specifically, based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309 during the short-time gaming state, the peripheral control board 1116 indicates the number of times the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (cumulative change count). The RAM is counted.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the gaming state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the cumulative variation count counted by the RAM is 80 times or more. It is determined whether or not.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 80 or more, the peripheral control board 1116 executes an advantage suggesting effect. That is, if it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 80 or more, the effect image of the lamp that is extinguished is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in subsequent time-saving games (not shown). Then, if the game state after the big hit game that is generated if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 is the short-time game state, the effect image of the lamp that has been turned off is changed to the effect image of the lamp that is turned on. If the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by changing the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state or the short-time game state In other words, if the game ball T is received at the V winning opening 1156, execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started to notify the player at every small hit whether there is a short time in the big hit that occurs.

  In detail, the case where the change display of the symbol is performed 100 times during the short-time game (the case where the lottery is performed 100 times during the short-time game) will be described. If the number of times the display of the game is displayed is 80 times, if the game ball T is received by the V winning opening 1156 by sliding the opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit, whether or not the big hit that is generated is a short-time big hit Is suggested in the remaining 20 times.

  When the peripheral control board 1116 reaches the number of times that the symbols are variably displayed up to 80 times without entering the big hit gaming state after the short-time game is started, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed (when the execution is decided). Clear the cumulative fluctuation count. In addition, when the gaming state shifts from the short-time gaming state to the big hit gaming state (when the short-time gaming is finished), the cumulative variation count counted by the RAM may be cleared. After that, when the gaming state shifts to the short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming is started, the cumulative fluctuation count is again counted in the RAM.

  Also, the cumulative number of fluctuations is cleared when the game is shifted to the big hit game state before the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner reaches 80 times after the start of the short-time game.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 hides the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 when the gaming state transitions from the short-time gaming state to the big hit gaming state or when the short-time gaming state ends. This completes the execution of the advantage suggesting effect.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration that backs up the cumulative fluctuation count, the cumulative fluctuation count can be continuously counted even when the power is shut off.

[3. Characteristic effects and the like of the fourth embodiment of the present invention]
The above-described fourth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same functions and effects as those of the first and second embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following functions and effects.

  In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the presence / absence of time reduction is notified by executing the advantage suggesting effect, so that the player is in an advantageous state depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (the jackpot with time reduction). ) Can be obtained.

  That is, based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is a short-time game state that is generated if a game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156 due to the advantage suggestion effect, the winning combination prize opening / closing member 1221 is displayed. Thus, the game ball T can be received in the V winning opening 1156 by a driving operation in accordance with the timing at which the winning combination winning opening 1155 is released. And the probability of a big hit with no time change and a big hit with a short time does not change by lottery, but the probability that it becomes a big hit with a short time can be increased by notifying that the gaming state after the big hit game is a short time gaming state (V By allowing the game opening T 1156 to receive the game ball T, it is possible to obtain a jackpot with a short time), and further, the player can continuously obtain a jackpot with a short time.

  In addition, as described above, in the short-time gaming state, when the number of times the display of the symbols is changed reaches 80 times, the player performs the advantage suggesting effect. A driving operation is performed with the handle device 500 so that the game ball T is not received in the V winning opening 1156. For this reason, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that is different from the monotonous gameplay of simply operating the handle device 500 and waiting for a big hit as in the conventional short-time game.

  Specifically, since the advantage suggesting effect is not executed when the number of times the symbol variation display is made is less than 80 times during the short-time gaming state, the player cannot change until the variation display count reaches 80 times. If a game ball is received in the winning opening 1156, it is impossible to know whether the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal game state or the short-time game state. For this reason, if the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 before the number of times the variable display is performed reaches 80 times, depending on the lottery result, the game state after the big hit game may be the normal game state. . On the other hand, if the gaming state after the big hit game is a short-time gaming state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than that in the normal gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

  In other words, the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of times the symbols are displayed in the short-time game state reaches 80 times. Therefore, if the game ball is received at the V prize opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect, it occurs. Based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game is the short-time gaming state, a game ball may be received in the V winning opening 1156 depending on the driving operation that matches the timing at which the bonus winning opening 1155 is opened. it can. That is, the player can obtain a jackpot with a short time by his own driving operation.

  For this reason, if the game ball is received at the V winning opening 1156 and a big hit with a short time is acquired, even if the big hit game is finished, the symbol change display is made 100 times than in the normal game state during the short game. Since the probability of winning a big hit is high and it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, the player can prevent the game ball T from being received at the V winning opening 1156 until the number of times of the variable display reaches 80 times. At 500, a driving operation is performed.

  In this way, when the number of times that the short-time game is started and the symbol variation display is reached 80 times, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, until the number of symbols variation display is reached 80 times, the V prize opening A player who performs a driving operation so that a game ball is not accepted in 1156 obtains a benefit that an advantage suggesting effect is executed while taking a risk. In addition, it is lost to a player who cannot accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156 even though the driving operation is performed so that the game ball T can be received at the V winning opening 1156 during the short-time gaming state. The feeling can be reduced. Further, even if a player who has received the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 before the number of times that the time-short game is started and the symbol change display is made 80 times after the big hit game, the short-time big hit and the short time With a jackpot, the probability determined by lottery does not change, so fairness can be ensured.

  And in the period when the advantage suggesting effect is executed (the period in which the number of times that the variation display of the symbol has been started and the number of times the symbol has been displayed has reached 80 times, the remaining 20 times) can always be obtained. It does not mean that if the number of times that the short-time game is started and the display of the variation of the symbol reaches 80 times, it is not always possible to win a jackpot with a short time with the remaining 20 times, and the game ball T is received at the V prize opening 1156 It is not always possible to earn a large profit even if it is not done (because it is not necessarily promised to be able to win a short-time jackpot), there is a high expectation for winning a short-time jackpot That will increase interest. However, since the probability inside the gaming machine does not change from the beginning (the probability of winning a win with no time and a jackpot with a short time does not change), the gambling is not greatly reduced.

  In addition, when the number of times that the short-time game is started again after the big-hit game and the symbol variation display is made reaches 80 times, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed again, so the player again It is possible to obtain a jackpot with a short time by driving operation. In this way, by performing the driving operation based on the advantage suggesting effect, the player can continuously obtain a jackpot with a short time by himself.

  When the short-time game is started, the number of times the symbols are changed during the short-time game state is displayed on an area other than the area where the symbols are displayed (decorative symbols are displayed) on the liquid crystal display device 1115 ( It is possible to clearly grasp the number of times the player has made a variable display during the short-time gaming state while paying attention to the symbol indicating the lottery result.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, it is assumed that “the predetermined condition is satisfied”, and that the player has advanced the game by performing a driving operation so as not to accept the game ball in the V winning opening 1156 during the short-time game. As described above, the case where the number of times of the symbol change display during the short-time game has reached 80 times without being in the big hit game state is explained. However, the game is performed so that the player does not accept the game ball in the V winning opening 1156 during the short-time game. If the condition intended by the player (the player can be involved) is satisfied, as in the case where the game is advanced 60 times and the small hit is obtained 60 times, the change can be appropriately made. Although not limited to the above 80 times, the timing (period) is such that the number of times that it is notified that it is a jackpot with a short time is 1 to 3 times as the timing for starting the execution of the advantage suggesting effect. It is desirable. In other words, it is desirable that the number of times that the game ball T can be received at the V prize opening 1156 is not reached to the number of times that the game ball T can be always received, but one to three times.

  Moreover, although the case where the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the symbol is displayed in a variation manner 80 times during the short-time gaming state has been described, it is not limited to 80 times. However, if the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started and the game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156 by the advantage suggesting effect, the notification is made that the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state. In order to secure a period during which the player can perform a driving operation in combination with the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 is released multiple times, the number of times the symbols are displayed in the short-time game without changing to the big hit game state is 80 times, 50 Or 30 times.

And as the number of variable display times of the symbol in the short-time gaming state, it can be determined at random from a plurality of variable display times. Specifically, for example, the number of times 1 is randomly determined from 80 times, 50 times, and 30 times. The number of times may be determined at the start of the short-time game, or may be determined when the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153 (or the first start port 1152) during the short-time game. . In addition, when the number of times is determined randomly, the number of times determined to the player may be notified,
It is not necessary to notify the player of the determined number of times.

  Furthermore, when the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is determined, the game ball T is accepted for each symbol change display (the second start port 1153 (or the first start port 1152) may be performed) in the subsequent short-time game state. Every time, it may be determined whether or not to execute the advantage suggesting effect, and the advantage suggesting effect may be executed based on this determination.

  Further, when it is decided to execute the advantage suggesting effect, a period in which the advantage suggesting effect is likely to be executed and a period in which the advantage suggesting effect is difficult to execute are provided in the subsequent short-time gaming state (the game period and the execution that are always executed). It may be a game period that is not played), and new game play can be added. In other words, when the advantage suggesting effect is executed when the symbol is displayed 80 times during the time-saving gaming state, it is not necessary to continuously execute the advantage suggesting effect in the remaining 20 time-saving gaming states.

  For example, when an advantageous suggestion effect is executed from 80 times in 100 time-short games, it is difficult to execute from 80 to 85 times, from 86 to 90 times, and from 91 to 95 times. 86 to 100 times may be easily executed.

  Further, as described above, when the number of fluctuations in the short-time gaming state that is an opportunity for executing the advantage suggesting effect is randomly determined, for example, when it is determined to be 30 times, it is executed from 31 times to 40 times It may be difficult to execute from 41 to 60 times, from 61 to 80 times, and from 81 to 100 times.

As described above, even when a period in which the advantage suggesting effect is easy to execute and a period in which it is difficult to execute is provided, the timing (period) in which the number of times that it is informed that it is a big hit with a short time is 1 to 3 times.
As a result, it is possible to diversify the game, and since the execution period of the advantage suggesting effect is longer than the other number of changes as in the case where the number of changes is determined to be 30 times, Since it is possible to make the player think that they are lucky, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for winning a jackpot with a short time.

  In addition, as described above, the case where the advantage suggesting effect is executed when the number of times the symbol variation during the short-time game reaches 80 times without accepting the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 has been described. Thus, it is possible to change the continuation mode of the advantage suggesting effect in the subsequent short-time game. For example, in a short-time game related to the first hit, if the number of changes becomes a big hit game with a short time between 80 and 90 times, the number of changes in the symbol during the short-time game will be 80 times in the subsequent games. In the case of a short-time game related to the first hit, if the number of fluctuations becomes a big hit game with a short-time between 91 times and 100 times, the short-time game in the subsequent games It can be configured to execute the advantage suggesting effect when the number of times of fluctuation of the inside symbol reaches 50 times. With this configuration, the player tries to obtain a jackpot game with a short time between 91 to 100 times of variation, but the player can play a game at the V prize opening 1156 between 91 and 100 times of variation. I can be thrilled to accept the ball.

  Furthermore, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect can be changed in the subsequent games according to the number of times of fluctuation in the time-saving gaming state until the time-saving big hit game. For example, during a short-time game related to the first win, if the number of times the symbol changes during the short-time game is a big hit game by 85 times without accepting the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156, the next short-time game is being played. Only in the case of the effect suggestion effect is executed. Also, during the short-time game related to the first win, if the number of times the symbol changes during the short-time game is 95 or more without receiving the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156, the next short-time game is included. It can be configured to execute the advantage suggesting effects in all of the five short-time games. By configuring in this way, for example, in the case where execution of an advantageous suggestion effect is scheduled in five time-saving games including the next time-saving game, there is no time-saving during the time-saving game next to the time-saving game related to the first hit. Even if it becomes a normal game state after a big hit game, if it becomes a big hit with a short time, an advantage suggesting effect will be executed, and the player will have a sense of expectation that he may continue to get a big hit with a short time It can be provided and the operating rate can be improved.

  As described above, when the “predetermined condition is satisfied”, the game progresses so that the player does not accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156 during the short-time game, so that the big hit gaming state is not achieved. It is a novel that the gameability changes by the player when the condition that the player can be involved is satisfied, such as when the number of times the symbol change display during the short-time game reaches 80 times. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be realized, it is possible to increase the interest in games.

  In the case where “predetermined condition is satisfied”, the game progresses so as not to accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156 during the short-time game, so that the player is not in the big hit game state and is in the short-time game state. Although the case where the number of times of the variable display of the symbol has reached 80 times has been described, the lottery result may be shown 80 times by the special symbol or the normal symbol on the function indicator 1114 during the short-time gaming state, There may be a case where the lottery regarding the game is performed 80 times without entering the big hit gaming state.

  Further, although the case of the handle device 500 has been described as the “operation means”, the advantage suggesting effect is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied by an operation unit operable by the player such as the pressing operation unit 405. can do. For example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the time-saving game is executed 100 times without executing the advantage suggesting effect. However, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the advantage suggesting effect is executed, but the time-saving game is executed. There is a possibility that a loss may occur for the player, such as performing 20 times, but there is a possibility that a profit beyond the loss will be obtained by obtaining the advantage that the advantage suggesting effect is executed by the operation Can be configured so that you can expect to be there.

  Note that the operation timing of the pressing operation unit 405 or the like (decision timing of whether to execute the time-saving game 100 times without executing the advantage suggesting effect or to execute the advantage suggesting effect but executing the time-short game 20 times) is as follows: It can be at the start of a big hit game state or at the start of a short-time game. Even if comprised in this way, since the novel pachinko machine 1 that a game property changes with a player can be implement | achieved, the interest can be heightened further with respect to a game.

  Furthermore, during the short-time game, in addition to executing the advantage suggesting effect when the number of times of display of the symbols reaches 80 times due to the progress of the game so as not to accept the game ball T in the V prize opening 1156, When the pressing operation unit 405 or the like can be pressed 100 times in one game (for example, after the decorative symbol starts changing until the decorative symbol changes), the advantage suggesting effect is executed. Can be configured. Even if configured in this manner, a novel pachinko machine 1 in which the game playability can be realized.

(Fifth embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration and operation in the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. Note that the pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration and the like as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, and thus the description of the same configuration is omitted. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on embodiment mentioned above.

[1. Technical idea of the fifth embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Lottery means for performing a lottery concerning a game when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied;
A passage control means for controlling the passage permitted state in which a game medium can pass through a specific area in the game area based on a lottery result by the lottery means;
Profit grant state control means for controlling to a profit grant state that gives a profit when the game medium passes through the specific area;
State control means for controlling the gaming state to a normal gaming state or an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal gaming state based on the lottery result when the profit granting state is terminated;
If the game medium passes through the specific area based on the lottery result after the profit granting state is finished and the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, the gaming state after the profit granting state is controlled to the advantageous state. Continuous advantageous state notification means capable of executing continuous advantageous state notification capable of determining whether to be performed;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the operation means (for example, the handle device 500) can be operated by the player, and the lottery means (for example, the main control board 1113) satisfies the predetermined lottery condition. (For example, when the game ball T is received in the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153), lottery (for example, random number update processing in step S1) related to the game is performed.

  The passage control means (for example, the main control board 1113) has a game medium (for example, a game ball T) in a specific area (for example, the receiving portion 1246a, the V winning opening 1156) in the game area based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Control is made to allow passage through, and the profit granting state control means (for example, the main control board 1113) controls to the profit granting state that grants a profit when the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, The game state is shifted to the big hit game state), and the state control means (for example, the main control board 1113) is advantageous over the normal game state or the normal game state based on the lottery result when the profit granting state ends. To an advantageous state (for example, the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state is controlled after the big hit game is finished).

  Then, the continuous advantageous state notifying means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116) grants profit when the game medium passes through the specific area based on the lottery result after the profit granting state is finished and until the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times. Continuous advantage state notification that can determine whether the gaming state after the state is controlled to the advantageous state is executed (for example, a big hit that occurs if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 after the short-time game is started) Notify the post-game status and raise the expectation for a time-honored jackpot).

  As a conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for a player when a game ball passes through a specific area by opening a movable piece or the like with a one-type pachinko machine that shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player when the main digital is in a specific mode. There is known a type 1 type 2 multi-function machine in which two elements of an old type 2 pachinko machine that shifts to a gaming state are mixed.

  However, since the one-type and two-type multi-function machines such as the above-mentioned gaming machines are not already new, it is becoming difficult to satisfy a player who seeks further entertainment.

  Also, in the type 1 type 2 multi-function machine, during a short-time game after the big hit game is over, many players wait for a big hit by firing a game ball to the right area of the game area by making a right strike. As a result, the game tends to be monotonous and there is a risk that the interest will be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the present invention, when the game medium passes through a specific area based on the lottery result after the profit granting state is finished and the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, the gaming state after the profit granting state is controlled to the advantageous state. The continuous advantageous state notification capable of determining whether or not to be performed is executed.

  In the following fifth embodiment of the present invention, when a short-time game is started, before winning the second special symbol determination result (lottery result) on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game, a V prize is won. If the game ball T is received in the mouth 1156, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect that suggests to the player whether the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state or the short-time game state is started. Then, a case will be described in which the execution of the advantage suggesting effect which has been started is terminated when the number of times of the variable display of the symbol in the short-time gaming state reaches 10.

  In other words, when the short-time gaming state starts, the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a is rotated by rotating the rotating body 1236 (see FIG. 124 (a)) by sliding the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit. If it is received in the V winning opening 1156 by rotating from the upward position shown to the right position shown in FIG. 124 (b), it begins to suggest whether or not the type 2 big hit that is generated is a short-time big hit (advantage) Start suggesting performance). Then, when the number of times the symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state reaches 10, the starting suggestion is terminated (execution of the advantage suggesting effect is terminated).

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The processing in the fifth embodiment of the present invention executes processing substantially similar to the processing by the main control board and the processing by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state is cumulatively stored in the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116, The execution of the advantage suggesting effect is terminated based on the stored number of times (the cumulative number of fluctuations).

  In the following fifth embodiment of the present invention, in the short-time gaming state, the symbol suggestion effect is executed from 1 to 10 times, and the variation number is from 11 to 100 times (the short-time game ends) Up to now, the case where the advantage suggesting effect is not executed will be described.

  Specifically, the peripheral control board 1116 starts execution of the advantage suggesting effect when the time-short game starts, and after the time-short game starts based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309. The number of times the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (the cumulative number of changes) is counted by the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116.

  When the advantage suggesting effect is started, the peripheral control board 1116 always displays an effect image of the lamp that is turned off on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and occurs when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156. When the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state, the V winning prize is obtained by changing the effect image of the unlit lamp to the effect image of the lit lamp for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). If the game ball T is received in the mouth 1156, the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal game state or the short-time game state, that is, the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156. For example, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect for informing the player of every small hit whether the big hit that is generated is short or short is started.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the gaming state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of changes counted in the RAM has reached ten.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 10, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect ends. That is, if it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 10, the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is hidden (not shown), and the game ball T is placed in the V prize opening 1156. If it is accepted, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect for notifying the player at every small hit whether the generated big hit has a short time is ended.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1116 may clear the cumulative fluctuation count counted in the RAM when it is determined that the cumulative fluctuation count has reached 10, or count the cumulative fluctuation count until the time-short game is over. You may continue.

  When counting the cumulative number of times of change until the time-short game is completed, the number of times of change since the start of the time-short game can be notified to the player by displaying the cumulative number of times of change on the liquid crystal display device 1115 or the like. However, it is desirable to display the remaining number of fluctuations in the short-time game based on the counted cumulative number of fluctuations (for example, it has changed 30 times since the start of the short-time game) in order to make the player more clearly grasp the timing of the end of the short-time game. In this case, the remaining 70 times are displayed).

  In addition, when displaying the cumulative number of fluctuations and the remaining number of fluctuations on the liquid crystal display device 1115, etc., the display of the short-time gaming state is made by not displaying between the number of fluctuations 1 to 10 in which the advantage suggestion effect is executed. Among them, it may indicate a special state where there is a high possibility that a time-honored jackpot will be obtained. When the number of changes exceeds 10, the remaining number of changes in the short time game is displayed as described above.

  Also, if the cumulative number of fluctuations continues until the short-time game ends, the short-time game state is a big hit game state from the short-time game state before the short-time game ends, or before the short-time game ends (before the change display is performed 100 times). When the gaming state is shifted to the next, the accumulated number of changes counted is cleared. The peripheral control board 1116 then counts the cumulative fluctuation count again in the RAM when the gaming state is shifted to the short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming is started.

  It should be noted that the cumulative variation count is cleared even when the game is shifted to the big hit game state before the number of times that the symbol is variably displayed reaches 10 times since the start of the short-time game.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 hides the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 when the gaming state transitions from the short-time gaming state to the big hit gaming state or when the short-time gaming state ends. This completes the execution of the advantage suggesting effect.

  Note that, by adopting a configuration that backs up the cumulative fluctuation count, the cumulative fluctuation count can be continuously counted even when the power is shut off.

  In addition, each time the short-time game is executed, the advantage suggesting effect can be executed from 1 to 10 times in the time-short game state.

  In this way, the peripheral control board 1116 starts executing the advantage suggesting effect when the short-time game is started. Then, when the cumulative number of fluctuations counted since the start of the short-time game reaches 10, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect ends. In other words, the advantage suggesting effect is executed only in the period from 1 to 10 variable display times in the short-time game.

[3. Characteristic effects and the like of the fifth embodiment of the present invention]
The above-described fifth embodiment of the present invention has the same functions and effects as those of the first and second embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following functions and effects.

  In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, a game is performed in order to notify the presence / absence of a short time by executing an advantage suggestion effect until the number of times of display of the symbols in the short time game state reaches 10 times after the short time game is started. The player can continuously obtain an advantageous state (big hit with a short time) depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 during the period from 1 to 10 times of variable display in the short time gaming state. It becomes possible.

  That is, if the game ball T is received at the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect that is executed until the number of times of the variable display of the symbol in the time-saving game state reaches 10 times after the time-short game is started, the big hit that occurs Based on the notification that the gaming state after the game is the short-time gaming state, depending on the driving operation that matches the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221, the game is played in the V prize opening 1156. Since the ball T can be received, the player can add a new gameability that allows the player to continuously obtain a jackpot with a short time.

  In particular, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started at the start of the short-time game, and the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is ended when the number of times of the variable display of the symbols in the short-time game state reaches ten times. For this reason, the player concentrates on playing the big hit with a short time in the period until the number of times of the variable display reaches 10, so that the interest can be dramatically improved.

  In addition, when the short-time game is started, the advantage suggestion effect is executed, so that even if the big hit game has ended, the player continues to play from the big hit game as if it is still in an advantageous game state. The player can feel that the period from the start of the short-time game to the time when the number of times of the variable display reaches 10 times is as lucky as the extended period of the jackpot, and the remnant of the jackpot game. Can be struck.

  Then, if the number of times the symbols are changed in the short-time gaming state exceeds 10, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed, and the player generates the game ball T at the V prize opening 1156. It cannot be determined whether the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state or the short-time game state.

  For this reason, the player grasps whether the game state after the big hit game that is generated when the advantage suggesting effect is executed and the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 is the normal game state or the short-time game state. If the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 in a period during which the game can be performed, the bonus winning opening 1155 is opened based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game is the short-time gaming state. By performing the game by performing the driving operation in accordance with the timing, it is possible to concentrate on the short-time game while subtracting the afterglow of the big hit game.

  In addition, even if a big hit cannot be obtained during the period when the advantage suggesting effect is being executed, the short-time gaming state is continued (because the number of fluctuations is 90 times in the short-time game), so the advantage suggesting effect is executed. The player can still have a chance to get a jackpot with a short time even after a given period.

  In this way, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started with the start of the short-time game, and when the number of symbol change display times in the short-time game state reaches ten times, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is ended, thereby giving the player On the other hand, by desperately trying to get a jackpot with a short time, the V winning opening 1156 allows the game ball T to be accepted, so that the monotony of the game during the short time game can be eliminated and the extended period of jackpot It is possible to make the player feel that such a lucky state, and to devour the finish of the big hit game.

  In addition, since the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is started together with the start of the short-time game, if the advantage suggestion effect is executed and the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156, the game state after the big hit game generated is the short-time game. A sense of expectation can be inflated with respect to the notification of the state being made and the start of the short-time game.

  Furthermore, if a game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, a game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by a driving operation performed based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is a short-time game state. The player can be excited about whether T is accepted.

  In particular, in the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is completed during the period from the start of the short-time game until the number of times of variable display reaches 10. For this reason, there is no room or hesitation to remove the so-called V in order to obtain a lot of prize balls by performing a driving operation so as not to accept the game balls at the V prize opening until the second half of the short-time gaming state. If the game ball T is received at the V winning opening 1156, the driving operation performed based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state can be prompted.

  Also, even if the number of times of variable display exceeds 10 times from the start of the short-time game, if the player is given multiple chances to get a jackpot with a short time by executing the advantage suggesting effect, the first chance will be relaxed. There is a player who tends to end, but the period until the number of times of the variable display reaches 10 by executing the advantage suggesting effect only from the start of the short-time game until the number of times of the variable display of the symbol reaches 10 times Thus, the player can be thrilled with respect to whether or not the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, and the tension can be maintained.

  It should be noted that the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state (the number of times the symbol is variably displayed) is displayed in an area other than the area where the symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. By adopting the configuration (not shown), it is possible to clearly grasp the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner while paying attention to the symbols indicating the lottery results.

  In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started at the start of the short-time game, and the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is ended when the number of times of the variable display of the symbol in the time-short game state reaches ten times. However, the present invention is not limited to this period. For example, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect can be configured from the start of the short-time game to the number of times of variable display 20 times, or the number of times of the variable display of symbols can be configured from 5 times to 15 times.

  However, the start of execution of the advantage suggesting effect is set at the start of the short-time game so as not to give room to perform the driving operation so as not to accept the game ball in the V winning opening, and the expected number of winnings with the short time (from 1 time) 2), it is desirable to set the execution period of the advantage suggesting effect so that the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started until the symbol variation display count reaches 10 times.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, every time a time-saving game is executed, a case has been described in which an advantage suggesting effect is executed from the start of the time-saving game until the number of times the symbols change display in the time-saving gaming state reaches 10. Whether or not to execute the advantage suggesting effect during the above-mentioned period during the short-time game state may be determined by lottery before the short-time game is started, or for every predetermined number of fluctuations during the normal game state (for example, , 100 times) may be determined by lottery. And, for example, when the number of changes is 500 and execution of the advantage suggesting effect is determined, it is not necessary to execute the lottery as to whether or not to execute each time after the number of changes. And when it is decided to execute, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the short-time gaming state by notifying before the short-time gaming state is entered.

  In addition, whether or not to perform the advantage suggestion effect during the above-mentioned period during the short-time gaming state depends on whether it is a big hit with a specific symbol (for example, “7”), It may be determined when a big hit is obtained when a predetermined number of reach is displayed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the pattern which performs an advantage suggestion effect may be determined when execution of an effect suggestion effect is determined. In this case, since an advantageous effect is executed, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the game by making the player think that he is lucky today.

  In addition, by performing a count display that indicates that the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is terminated when the remaining number of variations are displayed in the short-time game state, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is terminated after another number of variations are displayed. By displaying the effect, the player can be thrilled during the short-time game to obtain a jackpot with a short time while the advantage suggesting effect is being executed.

(Sixth embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration and operation of the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration and the like as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on embodiment mentioned above.

[1. Technical idea of the sixth embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
Launching means capable of launching game media into the game area;
Lottery means for drawing lots related to games;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, passage control means for controlling the specific area in the game area to a passage-permitted state through which game media can pass,
Profit grant state control means for controlling to a profit grant state that gives a profit when the game medium passes through the specific area;
A gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state after the end of the profit granting state to a normal state or a super advantageous state that is super advantageous over the normal state in a predetermined lottery count based on the lottery result;
Specification including being controlled in the advantageous state and including at least one of the predetermined lottery times being drawn with the specific result but having been used for the lottery without being controlled to the profit granting state Beneficial state acquisition means that can make it possible to determine whether or not the super advantageous state is controlled after completion of the profit granting state because the loss condition of
It is characterized by providing.

  In the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the launching unit (for example, the handle device 500) launches the game medium in the game area, and the lottery unit (for example, the main control board 1113) is used for the lottery (for example, the main control board 1113). , Random number update processing in step S1) (for example, lottery is performed when the game ball T is received in the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153).

  When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a small hit), the pass control means (for example, the main control board 1113) is a specific area in the game area (for example, the receiving unit 1246a, the V prize opening 1156). Is controlled to allow passage of game media (for example, game ball T), and the profit granting state control means (for example, main control board 1113) benefits when the game media has passed through the specific area. Based on the lottery result, the game state control means (for example, the main control board 1113) controls the game state after the end of the profit grant state. It is controlled to either a normal state or a super advantageous state that is super advantageous over the normal state in a predetermined number of lotteries (for example, control is made to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state after the big hit game is finished).

  The beneficial state acquisition means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116) is in a state controlled to the advantageous state, and at least one of the predetermined lottery times is controlled to the profit granting state even though the specific result is lottery. It is possible to determine whether or not it is controlled to a super advantageous state after the profit granting state is completed because a specific loss condition including the fact that the lottery has been completed without being completed (for example, the player can receive a V prize opening 1156 during a short-time game) When the game progresses so as not to accept the game ball T at the same time, and the number of times of the variable display of the symbol during the short-time game reaches 90 times without becoming a big hit game state, the game at the V prize opening 1156 is played in the remaining short-time game. If the ball T is accepted, the state after the big hit game that occurs is notified).

  As a conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for a player when a game ball passes through a specific area by opening a movable piece or the like with a one-type pachinko machine that shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player when the main digital is in a specific mode. There is known a type 1 type 2 multi-function machine that diversifies the game by mixing two elements of the old type 2 pachinko machine that shifts to the gaming state.

  However, although the game is diversified by making it a type 1 type 2 compound machine like the above-mentioned game machine, there are not a few players who are bored with the game and the interest is lowered.

  In addition, in the type 1 type 2 multi-function machine, many players who are playing short-time games will be in a state of waiting for a big hit by firing a game ball in the right area of the game area by making a right hit. The game tends to be monotonous, and there is a risk that the interest will decrease.

  Therefore, the present invention includes a state in which the lottery is controlled in the advantageous state and the lottery is digested without being controlled in the profit-giving state although at least one of the predetermined lottery times is drawn with the specific result. By making it possible to discriminate whether or not it is controlled to a super advantageous state after the end of the profit granting state due to the establishment of a specific loss condition, a decrease in interest is suppressed.

  In the following sixth embodiment of the present invention, when the number of times of variable display of symbols in the short-time gaming state reaches 90 times, the determination result of the second special symbol determination (lottery) is given to the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the small hit game. If a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the (result) is displayed, the player is informed whether the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state or the short-time game state. The case where the execution of the suggesting advantage suggesting effect is started will be described.

  In other words, when the number of times the symbols change display during the short-time gaming state reaches 90 times, the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a by the sliding of the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit is the rotating body 1236. Is the two-type big hit that is generated if it is received by the V winning opening 1156 by rotating (rotating from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b)). The case where it is suggested until the short-time game ends will be described.

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The processing in the sixth embodiment of the present invention performs substantially the same processing as the processing by the main control board and the processing by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state is cumulatively stored in the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116, Based on the stored number of times (cumulative fluctuation number), execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started.

  In the following sixth embodiment of the present invention, in the short-time game state, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed from 1 to 90 times, and the change frequency is 91 to 100 times (the short-time game is ended). The case where the advantage suggesting effect is executed will be described.

  Specifically, the peripheral control board 1116 starts execution of the advantage suggesting effect when the time-short game starts, and after the time-short game starts based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309. The number of times the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (the cumulative number of changes) is counted by the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the gaming state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of changes counted in the RAM is 90 times or more.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 90 or more, the peripheral control board 1116 executes an advantage suggesting effect. That is, when it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations is 90 times or more, the effect image of the lamp that is extinguished is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in subsequent time-saving games (not shown). Then, if the game state after the big hit game that is generated if the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 is the short-time game state, the effect image of the lamp that has been turned off is changed to the effect image of the lamp that is turned on. If the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by changing the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state or the short-time game state In other words, if the game ball T is received at the V winning opening 1156, execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started to notify the player at every small hit whether there is a short time in the big hit that occurs.

  In detail, the case where the change display of the symbol is performed 100 times during the short-time game (the case where the lottery is performed 100 times during the short-time game) will be described. When the number of times that the game is displayed is changed to 90 times, if the game ball T is received by the V winning opening 1156 by sliding the opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit, whether or not the big hit that is generated is a short hit big hit? Is suggested in the remaining 10 times.

  In the peripheral control board 1116, when the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner reaches 90 times without entering the big hit game state after the short-time game starts, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed (when the execution is decided). Although the cumulative variation count may be cleared, the cumulative variation count is continued until the short-time game ends in order to make the player know when the short-term game ends. In this case, if the game state transitions from the short-time game state to the big hit game state before the short-time game ends or before the short-time game end trigger (before the change display is performed 100 times), Clear. The peripheral control board 1116 then counts the cumulative fluctuation count again in the RAM when the gaming state is shifted to the short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming is started.

  Note that the cumulative number of fluctuations is also cleared when the game is shifted to the big hit game state before the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner reaches 90 times after the start of the short-time game.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 hides the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 when the gaming state transitions from the short-time gaming state to the big hit gaming state or when the short-time gaming state ends. This completes the execution of the advantage suggesting effect.

  Note that, by adopting a configuration that backs up the cumulative fluctuation count, the cumulative fluctuation count can be continuously counted even when the power is shut off.

  In addition, every time a short-time game is executed, the advantage suggesting effect can be executed until the short-time game ends after the number of times the symbol has changed 90 times in the short-time game state.

  In this way, the peripheral control board 1116 starts execution of the advantage suggesting effect when the accumulated cumulative number of times reaches 90, and when the gaming state shifts from the short-time gaming state to the big hit gaming state, When the gaming state is finished, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is finished. In other words, the advantage suggestion effect is executed only in the period from 91 to 100 times of the variable display number in the short-time game.

[3. Characteristic effects and the like of the sixth embodiment of the present invention]
The above-described sixth embodiment of the present invention has the same functions and effects as those of the first and second embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following functions and effects.

  In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, when the number of display changes of the symbol in the short-time gaming state reaches 90 times, the player is notified during the short-time gaming state in order to notify the presence / absence of the shortage by executing the advantage suggesting effect. During the period from 91 to 100 times of the variable display number, it becomes possible to continuously obtain an advantageous state (big hit with a short time) depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221.

  In other words, the game state after the big hit game that occurs if the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect that is executed when the number of times of the symbol variation display in the short-time game state reaches 90 times. Based on the notification that the game is in the short-time gaming state, the game ball T may be received by the V prize opening 1156 depending on the driving operation that matches the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. Therefore, the player can add a new gameability that allows the player to continuously obtain a jackpot with a short time.

  In particular, in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started when the number of times of the variable display of the symbols in the time-saving gaming state reaches 90 times, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed when the time-saving gaming state ends. finish. For this reason, the player has a high probability of winning the lottery, but the player does not accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156, and thus has a risk of causing a loss of winning the big hit. If the game is progressed until it reaches, the jackpot with a short time may be obtained in the period from the time when the variable display count is 91 to the end of the short-time gaming state (the period until the variable display is 10 times). Since the game is concentrated from the beginning to the end of the game, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest during the short-time game state.

  Specifically, since the advantage suggestion effect is not executed until the number of times of the symbol change display in the time-saving game state reaches 90 times after the time-short game is started, the player plays the game at the V prize opening 1156. If the ball T is received, it is impossible to grasp whether the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal game state or the short-time game state. For this reason, the player cannot enter the V prize opening 1156 before the number of times the change display is made 90 times despite the loss of winning a big hit by not accepting the game ball T in the V prize opening 1156. The driving operation is performed so that the game ball T is not received.

  However, the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the number of display changes of the symbol in the short-time game state reaches 90 times after the short-time game is started, so that the player accepts the game ball T at the V prize opening 1156. Then, it becomes possible to grasp whether the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal game state or the short-time game state. For this reason, if the player receives the game ball T in the V prize opening 1156, the player plays the role by using the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state. By performing a driving operation that matches the timing at which the item winning opening 1155 is released, the V winning opening 1156 attempts to accept the game ball T. In other words, the player will make a match in order to win a jackpot with a short time within 10 remaining variable display times when the short time game ends.

  As described above, when the number of times the symbol is displayed in the short-time gaming state reaches 90 times, the advantage suggesting effect is executed. Therefore, until the number of times the symbol is displayed is 90 times, the V prize opening Since the game operation is performed so that the game ball is not received in 1156, and the variation display reaches 90 times, the game operation is performed so that the game ball is received in the V prize opening 1156. By concentrating the game to the end, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest during the short-time game state.

  Also, since the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started in the middle of the short-time game, if the advantage suggesting effect is executed in the middle of the short-time game and the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, the after the big hit game that occurs A sense of expectation can be expanded with respect to the notification that the gaming state is the short-time gaming state.

  Furthermore, if a game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, a game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by a driving operation performed based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is a short-time game state. The player can be excited about whether T is accepted.

  In particular, in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed when the number of times the symbol change display is made 90 times during the short-time gaming state, so the number of times the symbol change display is made is 90 times. A player who is performing a driving operation so that a game ball is not received in the V prize opening 1156 until the value reaches is gained a benefit that an advantage suggesting effect is executed while taking a risk. Then, when the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156 by a driving operation performed based on the acquired benefit, it is possible to obtain a profit that a jackpot with a short time can be acquired. However, since it is not always possible to win a jackpot with a short time after 90 times, a thrilling time-short game can be made up to 90 times.

  For a player who cannot accept the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 even though the driving operation is performed so that the game ball T can be received in the V winning opening 1156 during the short-time gaming state. The feeling of loss can be reduced by executing the advantage suggesting effect.

  Furthermore, even if a player who has received the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 before the number of times that the short-time game is started and the symbol change display is made 90 times after the big hit game, the short-time big hit and the short time With a jackpot, the probability determined by lottery does not change, so fairness can be ensured.

  Also, during the period when the advantage suggesting effect is executed (the period when the short-time game is started and the symbol variation display is 10 times remaining), it is not always possible to win a jackpot with a short time, and a game ball is placed in the V winning opening 1156. Even if you do not accept T, it does not necessarily mean that you can get a big profit (because it is not always promised that you can win a short-time jackpot), so there is an expectation for winning a short-time jackpot The interest increases because of the higher. However, since the probability inside the gaming machine does not change from the beginning (the probability of winning a win with no time and a jackpot with a short time does not change), the gambling is not greatly reduced.

  Also, if the player is given multiple chances to get a big hit with a short time by executing the advantage suggesting effect before the number of times of the fluctuation display reaches 90 times, it tends to be loosened with respect to the first chance. There is also a certain player. However, in the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the player performs the advantage suggestion effect only during the period from the time when the symbol variation display count reaches 90 times to the end of the short-time game. In the meantime, it is necessary to decide whether or not the game ball T is received in the V prize opening 1156, and furthermore, if the variable display is made 10 times, the short-time game is ended, so the remaining variable display You can feel a sense of crisis as the number of times decreases and there is no later state.

  It should be noted that the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state (the number of times the symbol is variably displayed) is displayed in an area other than the area where the symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. By adopting the configuration (not shown), it is possible to clearly grasp the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner while paying attention to the symbols indicating the lottery results.

  In the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started when the number of times of the variable display of the symbols in the short time gaming state reaches 90 times, and the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is ended when the time saving game ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this period. For example, it is possible to configure the execution of the advantage suggestion effect from the time when the number of times the symbol has been changed in the short-time game state has reached 85 times until it has reached 95 times. Can be configured until the end of. That is, it is desirable to start the execution of the advantage suggesting effect from the number of times of change close to the number of times of end of the time-saving game (the end of the time-saving game state).

  However, based on the expected number of wins (1 to 2) that can be obtained with a time-saving jackpot, the end of execution of the advantage suggestion effect is set to the end of the time-saving game in order to concentrate the game from the beginning to the end of the time-saving game. It is desirable to set the execution period so that the execution of the advantage suggestion effect is terminated when the number of symbol fluctuation display times reaches 10 times after the execution of the advantage suggestion effect starts.

  Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, every time a short-time game is executed, an advantage suggesting effect is executed until the short-time game is finished after the number of times of the variable display of the symbols in the short-time game state reaches 90 times. As described above, whether or not to execute the advantage suggesting effect during the above-mentioned period during the short-time game state may be determined by lottery before the short-time game is started, or a predetermined number of fluctuations during the normal game state Whether or not to execute by lottery every (for example, 100 times) may be determined. And, for example, when the number of changes is 500 and execution of the advantage suggesting effect is determined, it is not necessary to execute the lottery as to whether or not to execute each time after the number of changes. And when it is decided to execute, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the short-time gaming state by notifying before the short-time gaming state is entered.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to execute by lottery for every variation until the number of times of variation display in the short-time gaming state reaches 90 times. For example, when the number of changes is 5 and execution of the advantage suggesting effect is determined, it is not necessary to execute the lottery to determine whether or not to execute for each subsequent change. And when it is determined to execute, it is possible to improve the expectation that the advantage suggesting effect will be executed by notifying before the advantage suggesting effect is executed.

  In addition, whether or not to perform the advantage suggestion effect during the above-mentioned period during the short-time gaming state depends on whether it is a big hit with a specific symbol (for example, “7”), It may be determined when a big hit is obtained when a predetermined number of reach is displayed. In this case, since an advantageous effect is executed, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the game by making the player think that he is lucky today.

  Furthermore, by performing a count display that displays that the execution of the advantage suggesting effect starts when the remaining number of times of change display is performed in the short-time gaming state, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the execution of the advantage suggesting effect. .

  In addition, you can get a jackpot with a short time while the advantage suggestion effect is being executed by performing a count display that displays the fact that the execution of the advantage suggestion effect will end when the remaining number of fluctuations are displayed in the short-time game state It can make the player throbbing during the short-time game.

(Seventh embodiment of the present invention)
Next, a characteristic configuration and operation of the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has substantially the same configuration and the like as the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment of the present invention, and thus the description of the same configuration is omitted. . Moreover, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated to the component similar to the pachinko machine 1 which concerns on embodiment mentioned above.

[1. Technical idea of the seventh embodiment of the present invention]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.
Launching means capable of launching game media into the game area;
Prior determination means for performing a lottery regarding a game when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the pre-determination means is a special result, passage control means for controlling a specific area in the gaming area to a passage-permitted state in which a game medium can pass;
Profit grant state control means for controlling to a profit grant state that gives a profit when the game medium passes through the specific area;
A post-grant state control means capable of controlling the gaming state to either the normal state or the advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state based on the lottery result after the profit granting state ends;
In the controlled to the advantageous state, when the special result and the lottery are drawn, if a game medium is passed through the specific area, it is possible to grasp whether the advantageous state is controlled after the profit granting state, Acquisition expectation maintenance means capable of being in the comfort acquisition state that is controlled or difficult to grasp in the advantageous state,
The acquisition expectation maintaining means is a notification switching means capable of switching between the concentrated acquisition state and the comfort acquisition state when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1), the launching unit (for example, the handle device 500) launches a game medium (for example, the game ball T) in the game area, and the preliminary determination unit (for example, the main control board 11139). When a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied (for example, when the game ball T is received in the first start port 1152 or the second start port 1153), a lottery regarding the game (for example, random number update processing in step S1) is performed.

  The passage control means (for example, the main control board 1113, the prize winning solenoid 1225, the V prize solenoid 1232) is based on the fact that the lottery result by the prior determination means is a special result (for example, a small hit). A specific area (for example, the receiving portion 1246a, the V winning opening 1156) is controlled so as to allow the game medium to pass therethrough (for example, the movement of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 and the rotating body 1236 is controlled), and a profit is given. The state control means (for example, the main control board 1113) controls to a profit granting state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that gives a profit when the game medium passes through the specific area, and a post-grant state control means (for example, the main control board 1113). , The main control board 1113) determines whether the normal state or the advantageous state (for example, the short-time gaming state) more advantageous than the normal state based on the lottery result after the profit granting state ends. To control to.

  And the acquisition expectation maintaining means (for example, the peripheral control board 1116) is controlled to the advantageous state, and when the game medium is passed through the specific area when the special result and the lottery are selected, the advantage is maintained after the profit granting state. It is possible to be in a concentrated acquisition state that can be controlled or grasped and in a comfortable acquisition state that is difficult to grasp whether it is controlled in an advantageous state. Is provided with a notification switching means that can be switched between.

  As a conventional gaming machine, it is advantageous for a player when a game ball passes through a specific area by opening a movable piece or the like with a one-type pachinko machine that shifts to a gaming state advantageous to the player when the main digital is in a specific mode. There is known a type 1 type 2 multi-function machine that diversifies the game by mixing two elements of the old type 2 pachinko machine that shifts to the gaming state.

  However, although the game is diversified by making it a type 1 type 2 compound machine like the above-mentioned game machine, there are not a few players who are bored with the game and the interest is lowered.

  In addition, in the type 1 type 2 multi-function machine, many players who are playing short-time games will be in a state of waiting for a big hit by firing a game ball in the right area of the game area by making a right hit. The game tends to be monotonous, and there is a risk that the interest will decrease.

  Therefore, the present invention is controlled from the acquisition state with notification that can be grasped if it is controlled to the advantageous state after the profit granting state when the game medium is passed through the specific area while being controlled to the advantageous state. The game is improved by adding a new gameability of controlling to a notification-free state, which is difficult to grasp, and then controlling again to the acquisition state with notification.

  In addition, in the seventh embodiment of the present invention, as the “changeable state between the concentrated acquisition state and the comfort acquisition state when the predetermined condition is satisfied”, in the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the number of symbol variable display during the short-time gaming state is 31 to 40 times, In the period from 61 to 70, from 91 to 100, during the small hit game, before the determination result (lottery result) of the second special symbol determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, the game is played in the V winning opening 1156. A case will be described in which an advantage suggesting effect is executed that suggests to the player whether the game state after the jackpot game that occurs if the ball is accepted is a normal game state or a short-time game state.

  In other words, when the number of times the symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 in the short-time gaming state reaches 50 times, the game received in the receiving portion 1236a by sliding the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221 during the small hit. If the ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the rotation of the rotating body 1236 (from the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b)), two types of big hits are generated. The suggestion of whether or not it is a big hit with a short time is started (execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started). Then, when the number of times the symbols are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state reaches 90 times, the started suggestion is terminated (execution of the advantage suggesting effect is terminated).

[2. Processing by main control board and processing by peripheral control board]
The processing in the seventh embodiment of the present invention executes processing substantially similar to the processing by the main control board and the processing by the peripheral control board of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention. However, in the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state is cumulatively stored in the RAM (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1116, Based on the stored number of times (cumulative variation number), the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started or the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is ended.

  In the following seventh embodiment of the present invention, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed when the number of changes from the start of the short-time game is 1 to 30 times, and is advantageous when the number of changes is 31 to 40 times. The suggestion effect is executed, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed from 41 times to 60 times, the advantage suggestion effect is executed from 61 times to 70 times, and the change times from 71 times to 90 times. A case will be described in which the advantage suggesting effect is not executed until the first time, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed from 91 times to 100 times.

  Specifically, the peripheral control board 1116 displays the number of times the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 based on the change start command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S309 (cumulative). The number of fluctuations) is counted by the RAM of the peripheral control board 1116.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 refers to the gaming state command transmitted by the main control board 1113 in step S7267, and determines whether or not the cumulative number of fluctuations counted in the RAM has reached 30 times.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 30, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started. In other words, if it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 30, the effect image of the lamp that is extinguished is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 (not shown), and the game ball T is displayed at the V prize opening 1156. If the game state after the jackpot game that occurs if it is accepted is the short-time game state, the effect image of the unlit lamp is changed to the effect image of the lit lamp for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, whether the gaming state after the big hit game is the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state, that is, in the V winning opening 1156 If the game ball is accepted, execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started to notify the player at every small hit whether there is a short time in the big hit that occurs.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 continues to count the cumulative fluctuation count, and determines whether or not the cumulative fluctuation count counted by the RAM has reached 40.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 40, execution of the advantage suggesting effect is terminated. In other words, when it is determined that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 40, the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 is hidden (not shown), and the game ball T is placed in the V prize opening 1156. If it is accepted, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect for notifying the player at every small hit whether the generated big hit has a short time is ended.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1116 continues to count the cumulative fluctuation count, and determines whether or not the cumulative fluctuation count counted by the RAM has reached 60.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 60, the peripheral control board 1116 starts executing the advantage suggesting effect. In other words, based on the lottery result relating to the 61st change, by executing the advantage suggesting effect as described above before the 61st change is started, the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156. Then, let us know if there is a short time in the big hit that occurs.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 continues to count the cumulative fluctuation count, and determines whether or not the cumulative fluctuation count counted by the RAM has reached 70.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 70, the peripheral control board 1116 ends the execution of the advantage suggesting effect. That is, as described above, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is ended by hiding the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1116 continues to count the cumulative fluctuation count, and determines whether or not the cumulative fluctuation count counted by the RAM has reached 90.

  If the peripheral control board 1116 determines that the cumulative number of fluctuations has reached 90, the peripheral control board 1116 starts executing the advantage suggesting effect. In other words, by executing the advantage suggestion effect as described above, if the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, it is notified whether there is a short time in the big hit that occurs.

  Then, the peripheral control board 1116 ends the execution of the advantage suggesting effect when the cumulative fluctuation count reaches 100, and clears the cumulative fluctuation count counted in the RAM. Note that the cumulative number of fluctuations is also cleared when the game is shifted to the big hit game state before the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner reaches 100 times after the start of the short-time game. That is, as described above, the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is ended by hiding the effect image of the lamp displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration that backs up the cumulative number of fluctuations, the cumulative number of fluctuations can be continuously counted even when the power is shut off during the short-time gaming state.

  In addition, every time a short-time game is executed, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed and the fluctuation display number of the symbols in the short-time game state is changed from 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times. It can be configured such that the advantage suggesting effect is executed in the period from 31 times to 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, and 91 times to 100 times. In other words, every time a short-time game is executed, the advantage suggesting effect can be executed without fail during the period from 31 to 40 times, 61 to 70 times, and 91 to 100 times. .

  In this way, the peripheral control board 1116 starts executing the advantage suggesting effect based on the counted number of accumulated fluctuations, or ends the execution of the advantage suggesting effect. Thus, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed when the number of changes since the start of the short-time game is 1 to 30 times, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed when the number of changes is 31 to 40 times. However, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed from 41 times to 60 times, the advantage suggesting effect is executed from 61 times to 70 times, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed from 71 times to 90 times. It is not executed, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed when the number of fluctuations is 91 to 100 times, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed intermittently.

[3. Characteristic effects and the like of the seventh embodiment of the present invention]
The seventh embodiment of the present invention described above has the same functions and effects as those of the first to third embodiments of the present invention, but also has the following functions and effects.

  In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, an advantage suggestion effect is executed in an intermittent period to notify the presence or absence of a short time, so that the player is in an advantageous state depending on the slide timing of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 It is possible to continuously obtain a big hit with a short time.

  That is, based on the notification that the gaming state after the big hit game is the short-time gaming state that occurs if the gaming ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by the advantage suggestion effect executed in the intermittent period. The player can receive the game ball T in the V prize opening 1156 depending on the driving operation in accordance with the timing at which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221. Can be obtained continuously.

In the short-time gaming state, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed from 31 times to 40 times, and the advantage suggesting effect is executed from 31 times to 40 times, from 41 times to 60 times. The advantage suggesting effect is not executed until 61 to 70 times, the advantage suggesting effect is executed from 71 to 90 times, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed from 71 to 90 times, and it is advantageous from 91 to 100 times Since the sex suggestion effect is executed, the game nature during the short-time game state can be changed.

  In other words, in the short-time gaming state, since the number of times the symbols are variably displayed is 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed, so the player receives a V prize. If the game ball T is received in the mouth 1156, it cannot be determined whether the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal game state or the short-time game state. For this reason, the player performs a driving operation so that the game ball T is not received in the V prize opening 1156 during a period in which the advantage suggesting effect is not executed.

  However, in the short-time gaming state, the advantage suggestion effect is executed during the period from 31 to 40 times, from 61 to 70 times, and from 91 to 100 times, so that the player receives the V prize opening 1156. If the game ball T is accepted, it is possible to grasp whether the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the normal game state or the short-time game state. For this reason, if the player receives the game ball T in the V prize opening 1156, the player plays the role by using the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is the short-time game state. By performing a driving operation that matches the timing at which the item winning opening 1155 is released, the V winning opening 1156 attempts to accept the game ball T.

  In this way, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed and the variable display count is 31 times in the period from 1 to 30 times, 41 times to 60 times, and 71 times to 90 times in the short-time gaming state. In the period from 40 to 61, from 61 to 70, and from 91 to 100, the advantage suggesting effect is executed, so the player's driving operation is different (the game ball T is not accepted in the V winning opening 1156) Thus, the game operation during the short-time game state can be changed, and the game operation during the short-time game state can be changed.

  In addition, since the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is started in the middle of the short-time game and the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is ended in the middle of the short-time game, the advantage suggesting effect is executed in the middle of the short-time game and the V prize opening 1156 is executed. If the game ball T is accepted, the game state after the big hit game that is generated is informed that the game state is the short-time game state, and the expectation can be increased.

  Furthermore, if a game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156, a game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 1156 by a driving operation performed based on the notification that the game state after the big hit game is a short-time game state. The player can be excited about whether T is accepted.

  In particular, in the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed and the variable display count is 31 times in the period from 1 to 30 times, from 41 times to 60 times, and from 71 times to 90 times. In the period from 40 to 61, from 61 to 70, and from 91 to 100, the advantage suggesting effect is executed.

  In other words, during the short-time game, the number of times the game is monotonous as the game progresses without gaining a big hit is set to about 30 times, and the game ball T is received at the V prize opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggesting effect. For example, the notification of whether the gaming state after the jackpot game that is generated is the short-time gaming state or not is based on the expected number (1 to 2 times) that a short-time jackpot can be acquired by changing the number of fluctuations to about 10 times. The execution period of the advantage suggesting effect and the period of not executing the advantage suggesting effect are set.

  In the period from 1 to 30 times, from 41 times to 60 times, from 71 times to 90 times, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed, and the number of times of variable display is from 31 times to 40 times, from 61 times to 70 times. In the period from 91 times to 100 times, by executing the advantage suggesting effect, there is a notification whether or not the game state after the big hit game is a short-time game state, and no notification is alternately performed. During the short-time game, the player can be attracted to the game to the end.

  It should be noted that the number of times that the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time gaming state (the number of times the symbol is variably displayed) is displayed in an area other than the area where the symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. By adopting the configuration (not shown), it is possible to clearly grasp the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner while paying attention to the symbols indicating the lottery results.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed in the period in which the number of times the symbols are variably displayed in the short-time gaming state is 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times. The case where the advantage suggesting effect is executed in the period from 31 to 40 times, from 61 times to 70 times, and from 91 times to 100 times has been described, but is not limited to this period. For example, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed in the period from 1 to 30 times, from 41 times to 70 times, and from 81 times to 100 times, and from 31 times to 40 times, from 71 times to 80 times. In this period, the advantage suggesting effect can be executed.

  In other words, the period during which the advantage suggestion effect is executed and the period during which the advantage suggestion effect is not executed can be changed as appropriate. However, as described above, the game progresses as the game progresses without acquiring a big hit during the short-time game. If the game ball T is received at the V prize opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggesting effect, the game state after the big hit game is a short-time game state. It is desirable to set the period based on the expected number (from 1 to 2 times) that the jackpot with time reduction can be acquired by making the notification about 10 times.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, the advantage suggestion effect is not executed in the period from 1 to 30 times, from 41 times to 60 times, and from 71 times to 90 times, in the time-saving gaming state, The case where the advantage suggesting effect is executed in the period of the variable display times from 31 times to 40 times, from 61 times to 70 times, and from 91 times to 100 times has been described. It may be determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, whether or not to execute the advantage suggesting effect is determined by lottery before the variable display count reaches 31, 61, and 91 times, and the execution of the advantage suggesting effect is determined in the above period. An advantage suggestion effect can be executed. In addition, before starting the time-saving game, it may be determined in advance by lottery in which of the above periods the advantage suggesting effect is executed.

  Furthermore, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns during which the advantage suggesting effect is executed and to determine one pattern from the plurality of patterns. Specifically, for example, in the period from 1 to 30 times, from 41 times to 60 times, from 71 times to 90 times, the advantage suggesting effect is not executed, and the number of times of variable display is from 31 times to 40 times, from 61 times to 70 times, In the period from 91 to 100 times, the first pattern for executing the suggestion effect, and in the period from 1 to 30 times, from 41 times to 70 times, and from 81 times to 100 times, the effect suggestion effect is executed. Without preparing, a second pattern for executing the advantage suggesting effect is prepared for a period of 31 to 40 times and 71 to 80 times, and one pattern is randomly determined from these two patterns. Can be configured.

  Note that the above pattern may be determined when the game ball T is first received at the first start port 1152 (or the second start port 1153) during the short-time gaming state. Thus, by determining the execution pattern of the advantage suggesting effect by lottery, it is possible to diversify the game.

  When determining a pattern at random as mentioned above, you may alert | report the determined pattern to a player. For example, when the above-described first pattern is determined, there are more opportunities to perform the advantage suggesting effect than the above-described second pattern, so that the player thinks that he may be lucky today. The expectation for can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the above-described seventh embodiment, every time a short-time game is executed, it is advantageous in a period in which the number of times of variable display of symbols in the short-time game state is 1 to 30 times, 41 to 60 times, and 71 to 90 times. The case where the advantage suggesting effect is executed in the period from 31 times to 40 times, 61 times to 70 times, and 91 times to 100 times without performing the sex suggestion effect has been described. Whether or not to execute the advantage suggestion effect during this period may be determined by lottery before the short-time game is started, or by lottery every predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) during the normal gaming state. It may be determined whether or not to execute. And, for example, when the number of changes is 500 and execution of the advantage suggesting effect is determined, it is not necessary to execute the lottery as to whether or not to execute each time after the number of changes. And when it is decided to execute, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the short-time gaming state by notifying before the short-time gaming state is entered.

  In the above-described embodiment, the period for executing the advantage suggesting effect has been described as an example. However, the period for executing the advantage suggesting effect is not limited to the example period, and the game to the end in the short-time game is performed. It is sufficient that the player can be attracted to the game. The period of the variable display count of the symbol in the short-time gaming state is 1 to 30 times, and the variable display count of the symbol in the short-time gaming state is 91 to 100 times As long as the period for executing the advantage suggesting effect is provided for at least two periods, the advantage suggesting effect may be executed.

  In addition, whether or not to perform the advantage suggestion effect during the above-mentioned period during the short-time gaming state depends on whether it is a big hit with a specific symbol (for example, “7”), It may be determined when a big hit is obtained when a predetermined number of reach is displayed. In addition, when execution of the advantage suggesting effect is determined, a pattern for executing the advantage suggesting effect may be determined (determining either the first pattern or the second pattern as described above) Also good). In this case, since an advantageous effect is executed, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the game by making the player think that he is lucky today.

  Further, when the pattern for executing the advantage suggesting effect is determined as described above, the advantage suggesting effect is executed before the time-short game is executed by notifying the player before the time-short game state is entered. It can inspire expectations.

  In addition, in the short-time gaming state, by displaying a count display that displays that the advantage suggestion effect is executed when the remaining number of variations are displayed, and that the advantage suggestion effect is ended when the remaining variations are displayed. The user can improve the expectation that the advantage suggestion effect will be executed by displaying that the advantage suggestion effect will be executed after displaying the number of times of change, and the advantage suggestion when the variable indication is displayed more times. Since it is attempted to obtain a jackpot with a short time while the advantage suggesting effect is being executed by displaying that the execution of the effect is finished, it is possible to be thrilled during the short time game.

(Other embodiments of the fourth to seventh embodiments of the present invention)
Next, characteristic configurations and operations of other embodiments of the fourth to seventh embodiments of the present invention will be described. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to another embodiment has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 according to the fourth to seventh embodiments of the present invention, and thus the description of the same configuration is omitted. And

[1. Rotation mode of rotating body]
In the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, the rotating body 1236 is rotated from the upward position (standby position) shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b). Thus, the case where the game ball T received in the receiving unit 1236a from the prize winning port 1155 can be received in the V winning port 1156 has been described, but other rotation modes may be adopted.

  Specifically, the rotating body 1236 waits in the rightward position shown in FIG. 124 (b), and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the rotating body 1236 is rotated to the upward position shown in FIG. 124 (a). The game ball T can be received in the portion 1236a. Then, the player can be throbbing with respect to whether or not the game ball T is received in the receiving portion 1236a by the opening / closing pattern of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 determined based on the small winning design random number, It is possible to enhance the player's interest by increasing the sense of expectation for receiving the game ball T.

[2. Suggestion by advantageous suggestion effect]
In the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment described above, the effect image of the lamp that is turned off is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115 during the short-time game as an advantage suggestion effect (not shown), and the game is displayed in the V prize opening 1156. If the game state after the jackpot game that occurs if the ball is accepted is the short-time game state, the effect image of the lamp that has been turned off is changed to the effect image of the lamp that has been turned on, so that the presence or absence of the time is Although the case where it alert | reports was demonstrated, it can be set as another aspect.

  Specifically, when a small hit is made during a short-time game, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 before the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115, Whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a short-time gaming state can be displayed in characters such as “There is a short time!” Or “No short time!”. Thus, by displaying with characters, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the presence or absence of time reduction.

  In addition, the presence or absence of a short time can be notified by changing the color of the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. Specifically, if a game ball is received at the V winning opening 1156, when the game state after the big hit game is a short-time game state, the decoration symbol is displayed in a rainbow color or the like, which is different from a normal decoration symbol. By displaying in color, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of time reduction while paying attention to the variation of the decorative design.

  Furthermore, the presence or absence of time reduction can be notified by changing the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1115. Specifically, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the cat character is displayed when the game state after the big hit game is the normal game state, and the game state after the big hit game is shortened. In the gaming state, by displaying the dog character, it is possible to notify the presence or absence of time reduction while diversifying the production mode.

  Moreover, the presence or absence of a short time can be notified by vibrating the pressing operation part 405 which a player can press. Specifically, if a game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156, the pressing operation unit 405 is vibrated when the game state after the big hit game that is generated is the short-time game state, and the game state after the big hit game is the normal game By virtue of stronger vibration and longer vibration in the short-time gaming state than in the state, an action such as a player hitting the glass unit 590 can be suppressed.

  That is, when notifying the presence or absence of time reduction by vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, many players operate the handle device 500 with the right hand to drive the game ball T into the game area 1100, and the left hand uses the pressing operation unit. Both hands are blocked because 405 is touched. In this state, it becomes difficult to perform an action such as hitting the glass unit 590 to insert a game ball into the prize winning port 1155, the receiving portion 1236a, and the V winning port 1156, so that damage to the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. can do.

  In addition to the vibration, the effect as described above can be achieved even if the presence or absence of a short time is notified by air from the pressing operation unit 405. Although the presence / absence of time reduction is notified for every small hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and notification may be made only when a lottery is drawn in a predetermined period for notifying the presence / absence of time reduction.

[3. Continuation of advantageous suggestion]

  In the fourth to seventh embodiments described above, it may be determined whether or not to continuously execute the advantage suggesting effect in the time-saving game after the time-saving game related to the first win according to a predetermined condition. For example, the first hit is limited only when a predetermined condition is met at the time of the first hit (a big hit with a specific design, a big hit with a specific random number, a big hit with a specific reach, etc.) The advantage suggestion effect may be continuously executed up to 3 times of short-time games including the following. In addition, if the specified conditions are satisfied in the short-time game related to the first win (only if the bonus is a specific symbol, if the bonus is a specific random number, etc.) The advantage suggestion effect may be continuously executed up to three times of the game. By continuously executing the advantage suggesting effect in this way, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for the short-time game related to the first hit, and further, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine with a new game added.

(Effects of the embodiment of the present invention)
Whether or not the game state after the big hit game that occurs when the game ball T is received in the V winning opening 1156 by executing the advantage suggesting effect as in the above-described embodiment of the present invention is the short-time game state. By informing the player, the player can be attracted to the game. Specifically, in the type 1 type 2 multi-function machine, it is possible for the player himself to win the jackpot after obtaining the right to win the jackpot (based on the lottery result, the game ball T is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 Therefore, whether or not the jackpot that can be earned is a more advantageous jackpot (whether or not it is a jackpot with a short time) is important information, and because it depends on the winning balls that can be earned, it attracts players more A gaming machine to be turned on can be provided.

  In addition, in order to solve the problem that it is difficult to notice that it was a big hit like the conventional 1 type 2 type multi-function machine, the pattern change pattern (variation time), background, etc. are changed and the V prize opening 1156 is changed. Even if the timing for accepting the game ball T is notified, the fluctuation time becomes long, so there are many opportunities to obtain the jackpot acquisition right, which is also a feature of the type 1 type 2 multi-function machine, and the jackpot after starting the short-time game It is not possible to take advantage of the property that the time to get is fast.

  However, in the embodiment of the present invention, since the advantage suggesting effect is executed as described above, useful information (whether or not it is a big hit with a short time) while taking advantage of the characteristics of the above-mentioned type 1 type 2 multifunction peripheral. Can be given to the player. Therefore, the player can be attracted to the game with consciousness of being able to get a big hit, avoid the situation of getting a big hit in an instant, and entertain the game (act) that wins the big hit Can do.

  Furthermore, in the type 1 type 2 multi-function machine, it is difficult to understand that the game ball T has passed through the V winning award as a specific area. You may not realize that you have won a big hit. However, as described above, by executing the advantage suggesting effect, the player tries to accept the game ball T at the V winning opening 1156 by the driving operation, so that the V winning opening 1156 can be noticed. Can be clearly understood.

  In addition, an opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the prize winning port 1155 determined based on a random number acquired by receiving the game ball T at the second start port 1153, and the game ball T is received at the second start port 1153. It is possible to adjust whether or not the game ball T is accepted or not accepted in the prize winning slot 1155 according to the pattern variation pattern (variation time) determined on the basis of the random number acquired by the player. Can change the operation.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4 Game board 1100 Game area 1112 Game panel 1120 Table unit 1134 Gate member 1150 Prize opening unit 1151 General prize opening 1152 First starting opening 1153 Second starting opening 1154 Large winning opening 155 Prize winning opening (variable entrance)
1156 V prize opening (special entrance)
1220 Bonus unit 1220A Bonus port unit 1220B V prize port unit 1221 Bonus port opening / closing member 1230 Unit front base 1230c Loss hole (discharge port)
1232 V winning solenoid 1232a Plunger 1233 Drive gear member (transmission mechanism)
1233a Shaft part 1233b Extension piece 1233c Drive gear 1233d Engagement part 1234 Driven gear member (transmission mechanism)
1234a Driven gear 1236 Rotating body 1236a Receiving portion 1238 Ball guiding member 1238a Peripheral wall portion 1238b Upper port (accommodating port)
1238c Right mouth (discharge port)
1238d Ball entrance 1238e Upper guidance part 1238f Right guidance part T Game ball

Claims (1)

Launching means capable of launching game media into the game area;
Lottery means for drawing lots related to games;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, passage control means for controlling the specific area in the game area to a passage-permitted state through which game media can pass,
Profit grant state control means for controlling to a profit grant state that gives a profit when the game medium passes through the specific area;
A gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state after the end of the profit granting state to a normal state or a super advantageous state that is super advantageous over the normal state in a predetermined lottery count based on the lottery result;
Specification including being controlled in the advantageous state and including at least one of the predetermined lottery times being drawn with the specific result but having been used for the lottery without being controlled to the profit granting state Beneficial state acquisition means that can make it possible to determine whether or not the super advantageous state is controlled after completion of the profit granting state because the loss condition of
A gaming machine comprising: